SectVI Specification V3of4

Republic of the Philippines
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION & COMMUNICATIONS

The Columbia Tower
Brgy. Wack-Wack, Ortigas Avenue,
1555 Mandaluyong City, Philippines
SECTION VI – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 3 OF 4
of the
BICOL INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT

PACKAGE 2A
Construction of Landside Facilities
(Site Development and Other Buildings)
NOVEMBER 2014
SCHEMA Konsult, Inc. joint venture with:
PERTCONSULT
INTERNATIONAL
DCCD PHILIPP’S TECHNICAL
CONSULTANTS CORP.
ENGINEERING Design Engineers ●Master Planners●
CORPORATION Construction. Manager
BICOL INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
Package 2A- Construction of Landside Facilities
(Site Development and Other Buildings)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES
VOLUME 1 of 4:
I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART A - FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER (INCLUDING ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE)
PART B - OTHER REQUIREMENTS
II. SITE DEVELOPMENT WORKS
• EARTHWORKS AND SECURITY FENCE/GATES
PART C – EARTHWORKS
Item 100 Clearing and Grubbing ........................................................................................................ 2

Item 101 Removal of Structures and Obstructions ............................................................................ 1
Item 102 Excavation ........................................................................................................................... 2
Item 103 Structure Excavation ........................................................................................................... 3
Item 104 Embankment ....................................................................................................................... 4
Item 105 Subgrade Preparation ......................................................................................................... 2
Item 106 Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips ............................................................ 2
PART F– BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION (for cross reference only)
Item 404 Reinforcing Steel ................................................................................................................. 3

Item 405 Structural Concrete ............................................................................................................. 8
PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
Item 604 Security Fence and Gates ................................................................................................... 6
• WATER SUPPLY WELLS
Section 1 Drilling, Construction and Testing of Test/Production Well ......................................... 18

Section 2 Submersible Deepwell Pump ........................................................................................ 4
-1-
VOLUME 2 of 4:
III. OTHER BUILDINGS
DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION
02302 Excavation, Backfilling, and compacting for utilities ...................................................... 8

02360 Soil Treatment ............................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast in Place Concrete ..................................................................................................... 18
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04800 Reinforced Masonry ............................................................................................................ 7
DIVISION 5 - METAL
05120 Structural Steel .................................................................................................................... 5

05300 Steel Floor Decks ................................................................................................................ 4
05520 Handrails and Railings ........................................................................................................ 4
DIVISION 6 – WOODS AND PLASTICS
06400 Finish Carpentry .................................................................................................................. 3
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE
07101 Dampproofing...................................................................................................................... 2
07102 Elastomeric Waterproofing system, Fluid- applied.............................................................. 5
07210 Building Insulation ............................................................................................................... 2
07410 Preformed Metal Roofing .................................................................................................... 5
07412 Roof Insulation .................................................................................................................... 2
07460 Aluminum Composite Panel ................................................................................................ 2
07900 Sealants and Caulking ........................................................................................................ 6
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Steel Doors and Frames ..................................................................................................... 4

08210 Wood Doors ........................................................................................................................ 3
08256 Wired Glass Skylight ........................................................................................................... 2
08420 Aluminum Doors and Frames ............................................................................................. 3
08423 Automated Door Control System ........................................................................................ 2
08511 Metal Wall Louvers.............................................................................................................. 2
08520 Aluminum Windows ............................................................................................................ 4
08710 Finish Hardware .................................................................................................................. 5
08800 Glazing ................................................................................................................................ 3
-2-
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09601 Epoxy Coating ..................................................................................................................... 3

09602 Granite Tiles ........................................................................................................................ 2
09604 Ceramic Tile ........................................................................................................................ 4
09605 Vinyl Flooring ....................................................................................................................... 4
09606 Rubber Sheet Flooring and Stair Thread ............................................................................ 3
09609 Homogenous Tile ................................................................................................................ 4
09611 Carpet Tile ........................................................................................................................... 5
09613 Gravel Washout Finish ........................................................................................................ 3
09614 Floor Hardener .................................................................................................................... 2
09615 Access Flooring (Raised Floor) ........................................................................................... 7
09702 Vinyl Coated Wall Covering................................................................................................. 4
09703 Plastering ............................................................................................................................ 5
09704 Abuse Resistant Interior Veneer Plastering ........................................................................ 2
09705 Fiber Cement Board ............................................................................................................ 5
09800 Ceiling Suspension Systems ............................................................................................... 5
09801 Aluminum Spandrel Ceiling System .................................................................................... 2
09802 Acoustical Ceiling ................................................................................................................ 4
09803 Plasterboard ........................................................................................................................ 4
09806 Perforated Metal Ceilings .................................................................................................... 6
09807 Linear Metal Ceilings ........................................................................................................... 6
09910 Painting of Building (Field Painting) .................................................................................... 6
09918 Special Coatings Tank Lining –Food Grade ....................................................................... 3
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10165 Toilet Compartments ........................................................................................................... 2

10350 Flagpoles ............................................................................................................................. 2
10810 Toilet & Bath Accessories ................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHING
12600 Furniture and Accessories .................................................................................................. 2
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13100 Lighting Protection System .................................................................................................. 3

13700 Airport Security Systems ................................................................................................... 10
13920 Fire Pumps ........................................................................................................................ 12
13930 Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems (Wet Pipe) ............................................................... 7
13940 FM-200 Gas System ........................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM
14210 Passenger Elevator ............................................................................................................. 3

14300 Escalators ........................................................................................................................... 9
14500 Baggage Handling Systems .............................................................................................. 10
14950 Passenger Boarding Bridges ............................................................................................ 14
-3-
VOLUME 3 of 4:
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (PLUMBING)
15110 Valves.................................................................................................................................. 3
15140 Domestic Water Piping ....................................................................................................... 3
15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ......................................................................................... 4
15152 Submersible Pumps ............................................................................................................ 3
15154 Submersible Booster Pumps............................................................................................. 10
15160 Storm Drainage Piping ........................................................................................................ 3
15440 Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (HVAC)
15011 Mechanical General Requirements ................................................................................... 10

15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ........................................................................... 4
15200 Noise and Vibration Control ................................................................................................ 8
15250 Insulation of Mechanical Systems ....................................................................................... 9
15483 Fuel Oil Handling System .................................................................................................... 7
15652 Chilled Water Piping Systems ........................................................................................... 19
15653 Unitary Air Conditioning (Split-Type) Systems .................................................................... 8
15682 Air-Cooled Water Chillers.................................................................................................... 6
15856 Air Handling and Distribution Equipment............................................................................. 7
15871 Ventilation and Exhaust Systems (FANS& BLOWERS) ..................................................... 9
15895 Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories ................................................................................ 10
15896 Secondary Cables and Wires.............................................................................................. 4
15971 Space Temperature Control Systems ............................................................................... 15
15972 BMS Instrumentation ......................................................................................................... 14
15973 BMS Inspection and Acceptance Testing ......................................................................... 13
15980 Supply and Installation of Elevator ...................................................................................... 3
15996 Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems ................................................................... 9
VOLUME 4 OF 4:
DIVISION 16 – Electrical
16011 Electrical General Requirements ..................................................................................... 10

16206 Power Generating Plants, Diesel Electric.......................................................................... 24
16262 Automatic Transfer Switches ............................................................................................ 10
16301 Underground Electric Work ................................................................................................. 7
16302 Overhead Electrical Work ................................................................................................... 9
16402 Interior Wiring Systems ..................................................................................................... 15
16462 Three-Phase Padmounted Transformer ............................................................................. 6
16463 Single Phase Padmounted Transformer ............................................................................. 3
16474 Medium Voltage Switchgear (Ring Main Unit)..................................................................... 6
16475 Low Voltage Switchgear ...................................................................................................... 7
16510 Interior Lighting.................................................................................................................... 3
16523A Constant Current Regulators & Regulators Monitors ........................................................ 10
16530 Exterior Lighting .................................................................................................................. 4
16711 Structured Cabling System.................................................................................................. 6
16722 Fire Alarm System ............................................................................................................... 9
16760 Public Address System ....................................................................................................... 5
16761 Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange (EPABX) .................................................. 6
16762 Closed Circuit TV System ................................................................................................... 8
16762A Flight Information Display System ....................................................................................... 4
*****
-4-
Division 15 – Mechanical (Plumbing)
Bicol international Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical
Section VI- Technical Specifications Valves
SCTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers gate valves, check valves, and angle valves.
Valves shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing materials, hangers,
supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.
1.2 References
1.2.1 Governing Standards
Except as modified or supplemented herein, all materials required in this section including
their installation shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following standards.
Standards current at the time of tender shall be used.
a. ANSI American National Standard Institute
b. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
c. AWWA American Water Works Association
d. MSS Manufactures Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
1.3 Coordination
Materials furnished under this section shall be the standard products of the manufacturer.
Where two or more units of the same item of materials are required, they shall be the
products of a single manufacturers.
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Drawings and Data
Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the valves and
accessories shall be submitted.
1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1.5.1 Storage and Handling
Valves shall be stored and handled in a manner, which will ensure installation in sound,
undamaged condition. Handling methods and equipment used shall not damage pipe and
fittings.
1.6 Quality Assurance
1.6.1 Tolerances
Unless otherwise specified, the actual length of valves shall be within 2 mm ( plus or minus)
of the specified or theoretical length.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
a. Gate valves
(1) 65 mm and smaller MSS-SP-80
(2) 75 mm and larger AWWA C500
b. Check valves
1. 50 mm and smaller MSS-SP-80
1 of 3
2. 65 mm and larger AWWA C508

c. Angle valves MSS-SP-80
d. Unions ASME B16.39
2.2 Performance and Design Requirements
2.2.1 Gate Valves
Gate valves 65 mm and smaller shall be solid wedge type, rated 125 psig at a minimum
temperature of 82°C. Valves shall be of bronze construction with screwed bonnet, rising stem,
and teflon impregnated packing.
Gate valves 75 mm and larger shall be rated 125 psig at a minimum temperature of 28°C,
double disc type. Gate valves installed in vertical piping shall be of solid wedge type. Gate
valves installed inside structures shall be of rising stem type with stuffing box stem seals.
Gate valves, which are buried or submerged, shall be nonrising stem types with O-ring stem
seals.
2.2.2 Check Valves
Check valves, 65mm and larger, which are installed in water pump discharge piping having a
working pressure of 125 psig or less shall be swing type designed for installation between two
pipe flanges. Each check valve shall have a cast iron or bronze body.
Check valves 50mm and smaller in water piping shall be rated 125 psig at a minimum
temperature of 28°C, all bronze, Y-pattern, regrinding, horizontal swing type.
2.2.3 Angle Valves
Angle valves 50mm and smaller for water service shall be rated 125 psig at a minimum
temperature of 28°C and 862 kPa at 205°C with bronze body, seat, and disc; screwed
bonnet; rising stem; teflon impregnated packing; and threaded ends.
2.3 Fabrication
2.3.1 Shop Painting
All ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, both interior and exterior, shall be shop
painted for corrosion protection.
Surfaces to be painted shall be as follows:
a. Exterior surfaces of all-rust-inhibitive primer
b. Polished or machined surfaces-rust-preventive compound.
c. Actuators and accessories-rust-inhibitive primer
2.3.2 Rotation
Unless otherwise required by the Owner’s Representative, the direction of rotation of the
wheel, wrench nut, or lever to open the valve shall have cast thereon the word “OPEN”, and
an arrow indicating the direction to open.
2.3.3 Unions
A union or flanged connection shall be provided within 600mm of each threaded end valve
unless the valve can be easily removed from the piping.
2.4 Accessories
2.4.1 Valve Boxes
Valve boxes shall be cast iron, extension sleeve type, suitable for the depth of cover required
by the drawings. Not more than one extension will be allowed with each slide type valve box.
2 of 3
Valve boxes shall have a minimum thickness at any point of 5mm, and shall be provided with
suitable cast iron bases and covers.
All parts of valve box, bases, and covers shall be shop coated by dipping in asphalt varnish.
Top sections and covers for valve boxes, which are to be provided with position indicators,
shall be designed for proper installation of the position indicator and accessories.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Manufacturer’s Recommendations
Valves and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and recommendations.
3.1.2 Valve Boxes
Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be placed directly over the
valve it serves, with the top of the box brought flush with the finished grade. After being place
in proper position, earth shall be filled in around each valve box and thoroughly tamped on
each side of the box.
3.2 Cleaning
The valves shall be smooth, clean, and free from blister, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other
foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the
satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, before being placed in service.
3.3 Method of Measurement
Valves shall be measured by the number of units installed required as shown on the plans
and details.
4.0 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Valves shall be measured by the number of units installed required as shown on the plans
and details.
5.0 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The quantities determined as provided in Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the
contract unit price, respectively for each of the Pay Item listed below and shown on the Bill of
Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials including labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this Section.
Payment will be made in accordance with the Bill of Quantities.
******
3 of 3
Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15- Mechanical
Section VI- Technical Specifications Domestic Water Piping
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers furnishing and installation of domestic water piping and piping
accessories above floor within the building and below floor under the building to 1.5 meters
outside the building below grade.
Domestic water piping shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing
materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.
1.2 References
1.2.1 Except as modified or supplemented herein, all materials required in this section including
1.3 Coordination
Pipe lengths and dimensions furnished shall be coordinated with the lengths for the valves,
fittings, and other items to be installed in the piping. All fittings shall have the same diameter
and shall be suitable for the pressure to which they will be subjected.
1.4 Submittals
Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the domestic water
piping and accessories shall be submitted.
1.5.1 Storage and Handling.
Pipe and fittings shall be stored and handled in a manner which will ensure installation in
sound, undamaged condition. Handling methods and equipment used shall not damage pipe
and fittings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Pipes and Fittings
a) Cold Water Piping
(1) Cold Water Lines – for risers, downfeeds& distribution lines shall be
Polypropylene (PP-R) Random (Type 3) pipe and fittings PN20, high
resistance to pressure and temperature, conforming to DIN specifications
DIN 8077 and DIN 8078 or ASTM F 2389, forming polyfusion homogeneous
joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
3.1.1 Field Measurements
Pipe shall be cut from measurements taken at the site and not from the drawings.
1 of 3
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Piping
Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the drawing or, in the absence of detail
piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.
The water supply piping at each fixture shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union,
whether indicated on the drawings or not, which will permit isolation and disconnection of
each item without disturbing the remainder of the system.
A union shall be provided within 600 mm of each threaded end valve unless there are other
connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. Unions shall also be provided in
piping at locations adjacent to devices or equipment which may require removal in the future
and at locations required by the drawings or specifications.
All necessary provisions shall be taken in laying out piping to provide throughout for
expansion and contraction. Piping shall be held free of contact with building construction so
as not to transmit noise resulting from expansion.
3.2.2 Polypropylene (PP-R) Random (Type 3) Pipe
PP-R pipes and fittings must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
recommendation.
3.2.2 Pipe Joints
Polypropylene (PP-R) Random (Type 3) : The maximum permissible support for (PP-R)
spacing shall be as follows:
d Distance between two brackets (cm)

(mm) 20ºC 30ºC 40ºC 50ºC 60ºC 70ºC
20 75 75 70 65 60 50
25 85 85 85 80 75 65
32 100 100 95 90 85 80
40 110 110 105 100 95 90
50 130 125 115 110 105 100
63 150 145 140 125 120 110
75 170 165 160 150 145 120
90 180 175 170 165 160 130
110 190 185 175 170 165 140
3.2.4 Water Hammer Arrestors

Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in hot and cold water piping.
3.3 Field Quality Control
3.3.1 Pressure and Leakage Testing
Tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor in the presence, and to the
satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. Each piping system shall be tested for at least
one hour with no loss of pressure. Piping shall be tested with water pressure of 100 psi
(690 kPa).
Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or
other positive and accurate method in accordance with AWWA M11 and acceptable to the
Owner’s Representative. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be
connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the specified test
pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as
required during the testing procedures.
2 of 3
All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances and devices
shall be furnished and all tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor
and at such time as directed by the Owner’s Representative.
All piping, fittings, joints which are damaged during tests and repairs shall be removed,
replaced and retested by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
3.4 Cleaning and Disinfection
3.4.1 Cleaning
The inside of all pipes, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters,
loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines
shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, before
being placed in service.
3.4.2 Disinfection
All disinfection work shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C651 and the
requirements of the Department of Transportation and Communications. The new
pipelines shall be disinfected by either the continuous feed method or the slug method or
the tablet method. The chlorinating agent consisting of hypochlorite solution shall be
injected into the pipeline at the supply end of each new line or valve section.
During disinfection, all valves shall be operated to ensure that all appurtenances are
disinfected. Valves shall be manipulated in such a manner that the strong hypochlorite
solution in the line being chlorinated will not flow back into the supply line. Check valves
shall be used if required.
Upon completion of chlorination but before sampling and bacteriological testing, all
heavily chlorinated water shall be removed from the pipelines by flushing with potable
water until the chlorine residual in the pipelines is not higher than generally prevailing in
the remainder of the system.
Bacteriological testing of water in the pipelines shall be performed after final flushing. A
standard plate count shall be made for each sample.
Should the bacteriological tests indicate the presence of coliform organisms at any
sampling point, the pipeline shall be reflushed, resampled and retested. If check samples
show the presence of coliform organisms, then the pipeline shall be rechlorinated until
results acceptable to the Owner’s Representative are obtained.

PE pipe shall be measured by linear meter and PE pipe fittings shall be measured by the
number of units installed required as shown on the plans and details.
******
3 of 3
Section VI- Technical Specifications Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers furnishing and installation of sanitary waste and piping, above floor within
the building and below floor under the building to 1.5 meters outside the building below grade.
It also covers furnishing and installation of floor drains, cleanouts, oil interceptors, and grease
interceptor within and under the building.
Sanitary waste and vent piping system shall be furnished and installed complete with all
fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.
1.2 References
1.2.1 American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
ANSI A112.21.1M Floor Drains
1.2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
ASME A112.36.2M Cleanouts
1.2.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems.
ASTM D2729 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints of Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
1.2.4 International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)
IAPMO PS 8 Oil and Sand Interceptors
1.2.5 Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)
G-101 Grease Traps
1.2.6. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE)
ASSE 1018 Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves Water
Supply Fed
1.3 Coordination
Pipe lengths and dimensions furnished shall be coordinated with the lengths for the fittings,
and other items to be installed in the piping.
1.4 Submittals
Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the sanitary waste and
vent piping systems and accessories shall be submitted.
1 of 4
and fittings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 PVC Pipe, Schedule 40
a. Pipe ASTM D2729
b. Fittings ASTM D2729
c. Solvent Cement ASTM D2564
d. Primer ASTM F656
2.1.2 Floor Drain ANSI A112.21.1M.
2.1.3. Cleanout plug ASME A112.36.2M.
2.1.4. Interceptors
a. Oil IAPMO PS 8
b. Grease Interceptor PDI G-101
2.2.1 Service Requirements
a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipes shall be used for sanitary waste and vent piping.
b. For Airport Facility
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings shall be used below building floor and below grade
to 1.5 meters outside building for sanitary waste and vent piping systems.
2.2.2 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Where cleanouts are required in finished floors or in partition walls, a nickel-bronze access
cover and frame with securing screw shall be installed over the cleanout plug. A cleanout
installed in connection with cast iron oil pipe above building floor and PVC pipe below
building floor and grade shall consist of a long-sweep ¼ bend or one or two 1/8 bend
extended to the place indicated. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have accessed covers and
frames installed with the finished wall.
Sanitary waste piping which is required to be buried beneath floors or underground shall be
PVC, as indicated on the drawing to a point not less than 1.50 metres beyond the outside
face of the structure. All sanitary waste piping buried beneath floors shall be encased in
concrete at least 150mm thick.
2.2.3 Floor Drain
Floor drains with trap primer connections shall be installed as indicated on the drawing.
Types of floor drain shall be as follows:
2 of 4
Trap primer shall be designed to maintain trap seal and shall automatically supply water to
the floor drains. Trap primer shall be designed in accordance with ASSE 1018.
a. Floor Drain
Floor drain shall be galvanized two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer and with
polished bronze funnel or anti-splash rim where indicated on drawings.
b. Trench Drain
Cast iron body with medium duty grating. Trench drain shall be cast-in-place.
2.2.4 Cleanouts
Cleanout shall be gas and watertight, and shall be provided with quick and easy plug
removal to allow ample space for cleansing tools.
Cover plate shall be chromium plated bronze flush type for cleanout on pipe concealed in
partitions.
Plug shall be cast iron ferrule with countersunk, screw type; shall be same size as the pipe
up to and including 100mm.
2.2.5 Oil Interceptor
Oil interceptor shall be pre-fabricated coated steel and equipped with a removable sediment
bucket and perforated flow-diffusing baffle. Oil interceptor shall be provided with gastight
cleanout covers which shall be readily accessible. Oil interceptor capacity shall be as
indicated on the drawing.
2.2.6 Grease Interceptor
Grease interceptor shall be if, commercially available, steel with gray duco coating inside
and outside and flow control fitting. Grease interceptor shall be sized in accordance with
PDI-G101 Standard and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Sanitary waste and vent piping shall be installed where required and shall, in general,
conform to the locations indicated on the drawings. Horizontal soil and waste pipes, 75mm
and smaller, shall have a grade of 6mm per 300mm, (1/4” per foot) but for drainage pipe
100mm and larger, the slope toward the drainage outlet shall be not less than 3mm per
300mm.
Bell-ups shall be installed with the top rim flush with the floor surface.
Packing box drainage from each pump shall be piped directly from the tapped outlet in the
bearing support bracket to a bell-up.
All vents passing through roofs shall be located at least 250mm from the intersection of a
cant with the roof deck, and shall be adequately flashed as indicated on the drawings.
3 of 4
3.2.2 Pipe Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees
will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made
for the specific purpose intended.
PVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric.
3.2.3 Floor Drains
Floor drain shall of types and sizes indicated on the drawings. Floor drains shall be carefully
adjusted to the correct elevation for proper drainage. Except at floor drains having integral
traps, each floor drain shall be provided with “P” trap and trap primer installed as closed to
the drain as possible, where indicated on the drawings.
3.3.1 Testing
Sanitary waste and venting systems shall be tested by filling with water to the level of the
highest vent stack. Openings shall be plugged as necessary. Each system shall hold the
water for 30 minutes without any drop in the water level.
3.4 Cleaning
The inside of all pipe fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale,
sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly
cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, before being placed in service.
PVC pipe shall be measured by the linear meter and PVC pipe fittings shall be measured by
the number of units installed required as shown on the plans and details.
******
4 of 4
Section VI- Technical Specifications Submersible Sump Pumps
SECTION 15152 - SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This Section covers furnishing and installation of sump pumps at the Bicol International
Airport.
The Sump pump shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, valves, electrodes
and other necessary accessories.
1.2 References
ANSI S2.19 Mechanical Vibration- Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors,
Part 1: Determination of Permissible Residual Unbalance.
ASTM A 27 Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application
ASTM A 36 Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM C 33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems.
ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM F656 Standard Specification for Primers for use in Solvent Cement Joints
of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
1.3 Coordination
All Equipment included in this section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer
who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and the satisfactory performance of all
the components over the full operation range.
1.4 Submittals
Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the submersible pump
and accessories shall be submitted.
The pump will be inspected for damage or other distress when received at the project site.
The pump and associated equipment shall be delivered, stored indoors as recommended by
the pump manufacturer, protected from construction or weather hazards at the project site.
The pump and equipment shall have adequate short-term storage in a covered, dry, and
ventilated location prior to installation. The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for
extended storage. Proper equipment for handling the pump shall be supplied and shall be
considered as special tools if not completely standard.
1 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Submersible Pump Parts Material
a. Shaft Seal Silicone Carbide
b. Motor Frame Die Cast Aluminum
c. Impeller Special Alloy Rubber
d. Discharge Bore Die Cast Aluminum
2.2.1 Service Requirements for Airport Facility
It is the responsibility of the contractor to supply a pump that will meet the performance and
design requirements without undue modifications to the sump as shown on the drawings. Any
such modifications shall be at no cost to the Owner and must be received prior approval. The
pump shall be capable of discharging capacity at a total dynamic head listed below:
CAPACITY LPS TOTAL DYNAMIC

QUANTITY REMARKS
(GPM) HEAD,M. (FT.)
1 1.0 (15) 7.62(25) DUTY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
Furnish one set of all necessary tools/special tools required to completely assemble,
disassemble, or maintain the pumps. Special tools refers to oversized or specially
dimensioned tools, special attachment or fixtures, or any similar items.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Submersible Sump Pump
Each pump and engine shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the
manufacturer and under the direct supervision of the manufacturer’s representative or
installation engineer. The Contractor shall furnish a competent installation engineer who is
knowledgeable and experienced with the installation and start-up procedures for submersible
pumps and the associated equipment specified. Installation/erecting engineers provided by
this section shall include those from Contractor’s suppliers. When so requested, the
installation engineer shall be responsible for providing complete and correct direction during
installation, initial starting, and subsequent operation of equipment until field tests are
completed. The installation engineer shall initiate instructions for actions necessary for proper
receipt, inspection, handling, uncarting, assembly, and testing equipment. The installation
engineer shall also keep a record of measurements taken during erection and shall furnish
one copy to the Contractor on request or on the completion of the installation of assembly or
part. The erecting shall instruct the Contractor or others as designated in the operation and
maintenance features of the pump units.
The pump shall be tested at the manufacturer’s shop to demonstrate that the proposed pump
operates without instability and complies with specified performance. Instability is defined
when any point in usable range of the head-capacity curve cannot be repeated within 3
percent. When this occurs, the test shall be rerun. Test Procedures, except as herein
specified, shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of HI 2.6. The temperature of the
water used for testing shall be approximately the same for all tests run and shall be recorded
during test runs.
2 of 3

The submersible pump including accessories shall be measured by the number of set
required as shown on the plan and detail installed and accepted.
******
3 of 3
Section VI- Technical Specifications Submersible Booster Pump
SECTION 15154 - SUBMERSIBLE BOOSTER PUMP
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This Section covers furnishing and installation of booster pump at location indicated on the
drawings.
The booster pump shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, valves, electrodes
and other necessary accessories.
1.2 Coordination
All equipment included in this section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer
who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and the satisfactory performance of all
the components over the full operation range.
1.3 Submittals
Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the submersible pump
and accessories shall be submitted.
The pump will be inspected for damage or other distress when received at the project site.
The pump and associated equipment shall be delivered, stored indoors as recommended by
the pump manufacturer, protected from construction or weather hazards at the project site.
The pump and equipment shall have adequate short-term storage in a covered, dry, and
ventilated location prior to installation. The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for
extended storage. Proper equipment for handling the pump shall be supplied and shall be
considered as special tools if not completely standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 General
a. All equipment shall be supplied from reputable firms engaged in the manufacturer of
each particular item. The entire assembly as installed shall be given a start-up and test
run to prove that all the Specifications have been met before acceptance by the Owner.
The test duration shall be 24 hours. Submittal of the Certificate of Test to the Owner
shall be a condition of final payment.
b. The Specifications stated herein are basic guides only. Other items not so indicated but
which are obviously necessary for the proper operation of system as intended shall be
supplied in accordance with accepted engineering standards.
c. The equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of at least one year of trouble free
operation. The supplier of equipment shall certify to the availability of spare parts locally
and service in case of system breakdowns within a period of at least three years.
Manuals of operation and maintenance and lists of spare parts shall be supplied
together with the equipment. Submittal of Warranty Certificate shall be a condition for
final payment.
d. The supplier shall submit at least two copies of pump performance curves showing,
among others, the pump rating and pump efficiency properly marked thereon.
1 of 10
e. Accessories to be supplied for each pump shall include one non-slam type check valve
and two (2) gate valves, of size equal to the size of pump discharge and suction, rated
150 psi. Also, one pressure gauge for each set of pumps and pipe fittings necessary for
complete installation shall be provided. The pressure gauge shall be 100 mm face
diameter and shall be reading from 0 psi (or 0 kg/cm2) to 100 psi (or 7 kg/cm2).
f. Price quoted shall include cost of delivery of all quoted items to the jobsite. Pump and
motor installation dimension drawings shall be submitted together with the quotation.
g. The brands, names and place of manufacture of pump, motor, valves, controls and all
accessories where applicable shall be indicated in the quotation. Also, a description of
pump impellers being offered shall be included.
h. A metal nameplate indicating in indelible letters the correct Specifications of the pump
and motor shall be properly attached to the assembly at a location such that the
information written thereon can be conveniently read by all concerned.
i. Separate price shall be quoted for installation work, preparation and submittal of as-
installed Drawings.
2.2 PUMPING EQUIPMENT

2.2.1 Variable Speed Booster System
a. Scope
Supply and installation of a pre-fabricated and tested variable speed packaged

system to maintain constant water delivery pressure.
b. Pumps
The pumps shall be in-line vertical multi-stage centrifugal pumps with one external
frequency converter. The unit shall be rated for a total system capacity of 300 GPM
at a discharge head of 150 feet when supplied with a working suction head of 1 foot.
Each pump shall be sized as indicated:
Triplex System
Pump P1 = 100 GPM (50% of Total System Flow)
Pump P2 = 100 GPM (50% of Total System Flow)
Pump P3 = 100 GPM (Stand-by Unit)
The head-capacity curve shall have a steady rise in head from maximum to minimum
flow within the preferred operating region. The shut-off head shall be a minimum of
20% higher than the head at the best efficiency point.
The pumps shall have the following features:
(i) The pump impellers shall be secured directly to the pump shaft by means of
a splined shaft arrangement.
(ii) The suction/discharge base shall have ANSI Class 250 flange or internal pipe
thread (NPT) connections as determined by the pump station manufacturer.
(iii) Pump Construction.
 Suction/discharge base, pump head,

motor stool Cast iron (Class 30)
2 of 10
 Impellers, diffuser chambers, outer sleeve: 304 Stainless Steel

 Shaft: 316 or 431 Stainless Steel
 Impeller wear rings: 304 Stainless Steel
 Shaft journals and chamber bearings: Silicon Carbide
 O-rings: EPDM
Shaft couplings for motor flange sizes 184TC and smaller shall be made of cast iron
or sintered steel. Shaft couplings for motor flange sizes larger than 184TC shall be
made of ductile iron (ASTM 60-40-18).
(iv) The shaft seal shall be a balanced o-ring cartridge type with the following
features:
 Collar, Drivers, Spring: 316 Stainless Steel

 Shaft Sleeve, Gland Plate: 316 Stainless Steel
 Stationary Ring: Silicon Carbide
 Rotating Ring: Silicon Carbide
 O-rings: EPDM
The Silicon Carbide shall be imbedded with graphite.
(v) Shaft seal replacement shall be possible without removal of any pump
components other than the coupling guard, shaft coupling and motor. The
entire cartridge shaft seal shall be removable as a one piece component.
Pumps with motors equal to or larger than 15 hp (fifteen horsepower) shall
have adequate space within the motor stool so that shaft seal replacement is
possible without motor removal.
c. Variable Frequency Drive
(i) The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency single-phase or three-phase
AC power into a variable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of
three-phase AC induction motors. The VFD shall be a six-pulse input design,
and the input voltage rectifier shall employ a full wave diode bridge; VFD’s
utilizing controlled SCR rectifiers shall not be acceptable. The output
waveform shall closely approximate a sine wave. The VFD shall be of a PWM
output design utilizing current IGBT inverter technology and voltage vector
control of the output PWM waveform.
(ii) The VFD shall include a full-wave diode bridge rectifier and maintain a
displacement power factor of near unity regardless of speed and load.
(iii) The VFD shall produce an output waveform capable of handling maximum
motor cable distances of up to 1,000 ft. (unshielded) without tripping or
derating.
(iv) The VFD shall utilize an output voltage-vector switching algorithm, or

equivalent, in both variable and constant torque modes. VFD’s that utilize
Sine-Coded PWM or Look-up tables shall not be acceptable.
(v) VFD shall automatically boost power factor at lower speeds.
(vi) The VFD shall be able to provide its full rated output current continuously at
110% of rated current for 60 seconds.
3 of 10
(vii) An empty pipe fill mode shall be available to fill an empty pipe in a short
period of time, and then revert to the PID controller for stable operation.
(viii) Switching of the input power to the VFD shall be possible without interlocks
or damage to the VFD at a minimum interval of 2 minutes.
(ix) Switching of power on the output side between the VFD and the motor shall
be possible with no limitation or damage to the VFD and shall require no
additional interlocks.
(x) The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fans for quiet operation,
minimized internal losses, and greatly increased fan life.
(xi) VFD shall provide full torque to the motor given input voltage fluctuations of
up to +10% to -15% of the rated input voltage.
(xii) The VFD shall provide internal DC link reactors to minimize power line
harmonics and to provide near unity power factor. VFD’s without a DC link
reactor shall provide a 5% impedance line side reactor.
(xiii) VFD to be provided with the following protective features:
 VFD shall have input surge protection utilizing MOV’s, spark gaps,
and Zener diodes to withstand surges of 2.3 times line voltage for 1.3
msec.
 VFD shall include circuitry to detect phase imbalance and phase loss
on the input side of the VFD.
 VFD shall include current sensors on all three-output phases to

detect and report phase loss to the motor. The VFD will identify which
of the output phases is low or lost.
 VFD shall auto-derate the output voltage and frequency to the motor
in the presence of sustained ambient temperatures higher than the
normal operating range, so as not to trip on an inverter temperature
fault. The use of this feature shall be user-selectable and a warning
will be exported during the event. Function shall reduce switching
frequency before reducing motor speed.
 VFD shall auto-derate the output frequency by limiting the output

current before allowing the VFD to trip on overload. Speed can be
reduced, but not stopped.
 The VFD shall have the option of an integral RFI filter. VFD
enclosures shall be made of metal to minimize RFI and provide
immunity.
(xiv) VFD to be provided with the following interface features:
 VFD shall provide an alphanumeric backlit display keypad, which

may be remotely mounted using standard 9-pin cable. VFD may be
operated with keypad disconnected or removed entirely. Keypad
may be disconnected during normal operation without the need to
stop the motor or disconnect power to the VFD.
 VFD shall display all faults in plain text; VFD’s, which can display
only fault codes, are not acceptable.
4 of 10
 All VFD’s shall be of the same series, and shall utilize a common
control card and LCP (keypad/display unit) throughout the rating
range. The control cards and keypads shall be interchangeable
through the entire range of drives used on the project.
 VFD keypad shall be capable of storing drive parameter values in

non-volatile RAM uploaded to it from the VFD, and shall be capable
of downloading stored values to the VFD to facilitate programming of
multiple drives in similar applications, or as a means of backing up
the programmed parameters.
 A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-

ON light shall be provided. These indications shall be visible both on
the keypad and on the VFD when the keypad is removed.
 A start guide menu with factory preset typical parameters shall be

provided on the VFD to facilitate commissioning.
 VFD shall provide full galvanic isolation with suitable potential

separation from the power sources (control, signal, and power
circuitry within the drive) to ensure compliance with PELV
requirements and to protect PLC’s and other connected equipment
from power surges and spikes.
 All inputs and outputs shall be optically isolated. Isolation boards

between the VFD and external control devices shall not be required.
 There shall be three programmable digital inputs for interfacing with

the systems external control and safety interlock circuitry. An
additional digital input is preprogrammed for start/stop.
 The VFD shall have two analog signal inputs. One dedicated for
sensor input and one for external set point input.
 One programmable analog output shall be provided for indication of a

drive status.
 The VFD shall provide two user programmable relays with selectable
functions. Two form ‘C’ 230VAC/2A rated dry contact relay outputs
shall be provided.
 The VFD shall store in memory the last 5 faults with time stamp and
recorded data.
 The VFD shall be equipped with a standard RS-485 serial

communications port for communication to the multi-pump controller.
The bus communication protocol for the VFD shall be the same as
the controller protocol.
(xv) VFD service conditions:
 Ambient temperature operating range, -10 to 45ºC (14 to 113F).
 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.
 Elevation to 1000 meters (3,300 feet) without derating.
5 of 10
 VFD’s shall be rated for line voltage of 380 to 480VAC; with +10% to
-15% variations. Line frequency variation of ± 2% shall be
acceptable.
 No side clearance shall be required for cooling of the units.
d. Fixed Speed Motors
(i) Fixed Speed Motors are to be provided with the following basic features:
(ii) Designed for continuous duty operation, NEMA design B with a 1.15 service
factor.
(iii) Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled or Open Drip Proof with Class F insulation.
(iv) Nameplate shall have, as a minimum, all information as described in NEMA

Standard MG 1-20.40.1.
(v) Motors shall have a NEMA C-Flange for vertical mounting.
5. Drive end bearings shall be adequately sized so that the minimum L10 bearing
life is 17,500 hours at the minimum allowable continuous flow rate for the pump.
e. Pump System Controller
(i) The pump system controller shall be a standard product developed and
supported by the pump manufacturer.
(ii) The controller shall be microprocessor based capable of having software

changes and updates via personal computer (notebook). The controller user
interface shall have a VGA display with a minimum screen size of 3-1/2” x 4-
5/8” for easy viewing of system status parameters and for field programming.
The display shall have a back light with contrast adjustment. Password
protection of system settings shall be standard.
(iii) The controller shall provide internal galvanic isolation to all digital and analog
inputs as well as all fieldbus connections.
(iv) The controller shall display the following as status readings from a single
display on the controller (this display shall be the default):
 Current value of the control parameter, (typically discharge pressure)

 Most recent existing alarm (if any)
 System status with current operating mode
 Status of each pump with current operating mode and rotational
speed as a percentage (%)
(v) The controller shall have as a minimum the following hardware inputs and
outputs:
 Three analog inputs (4-20mA or 0-10VDC)

 Three digital inputs
 Two digital outputs
 Ethernet connection
 Field Service connection to PC for advanced programming and data
logging
6 of 10
(vi) Pump system programming (field adjustable) shall include as a minimum the
following:
 Water shortage protection (analog or digital)

 Transducer Settings (Suction and Discharge Analog supply/range)
 PI Controller (Proportional gain and Integral time) settings
 High system pressure indication and shut-down
 Low system pressure indication and shut-down
 Low suction pressure/level shutdown (via digital contact)
 Low suction pressure/level warning (via analog signal)
 Low suction pressure/level shutdown (via analog signal)
 Flow meter settings (if used, analog signal)

(vii) The system controller shall be able to accept up to seven programmable set-
points via a digital input, (additional input/output module may be required).
(viii) The controller shall have advanced water shortage protection. When analog
sensors (level or pressure) are used for water shortage protection, there shall
be two indication levels. One level is for warning indication only (indication
that the water level/pressure is getting lower than expected levels) and the
other level is for complete system shut-down (water or level is so low that
pump damage can occur). System restart after shut-down shall be manual or
automatic (user selectable).
(ix) The system pressure set-point shall be capable of being automatically

adjusted by using an external set-point influence. The set-point influence
function enables the user to adjust the control parameter (typically pressure)
by measuring an additional parameter. (Example: Lower the system
pressure set-point based on a flow measurement to compensate for lower
friction losses at lower flow rates).
(x) The controller shall be capable of receiving a remote analog set-point (4-
20mA or 0-10 VDC) as well as a remote system on/off (digital) signal.
(xi) The pump system controller shall store up to 24 warning and alarms in
memory. The time, date and duration of each alarm shall be recorded. A
potential-free relay shall be provided for alarm notification to the building
management system. The controller shall display the following alarm
conditions:
High System Pressure Low system pressure
Low suction pressure (warning and/or alarm) Individual pump failure
VFD trip/failure Loss of sensor signal (4-20 mA)
Loss of remote set-point signal (4-20mA) System power loss
(xii) The pump system controller shall be mounted in a UL Type 3R rated

enclosure. A self-certified NEMA enclosure rating shall not be considered
equal. The entire control panel shall be UL 508 listed as an assembly. The
control panel shall include a main disconnect, circuit breakers for each pump
and the control circuit and control relays for alarm functions.
7 of 10
Control panel options shall include, but not be limited to:
Pump Run Lights Pump Alarm Lights
System Fault Light Audible Alarm (80 db[A])
Surge Arrestor Control Panel Internal

Illumination
Emergency/Normal Operation Switches Service Disconnect Switches
(xiii) The controller shall be capable of receiving a redundant sensor input to

function as a backup to the primary sensor (typically discharge pressure).
(xiv) The controller shall have a pump “Test Run” feature such that pumps are
switched on during periods of inactivity (system is switched to the “off”
position but with electricity supply still connected). The inoperative pumps
shall be switched on for a period of two to three (2-3) seconds every 24
hours, 48 hours or once per week (user selectable).
(xv) The actual pump performance curves (5th order polynomial) shall be loaded
(software) into the pump system controller.
f. Hydropneumatic Presure Tank
A 350 gallon nominal (or as recommended by pump manufacturer) bladder- type

(“bag type”) carbon steel hydropneumatic pressure tank, designed to ASME Code
and stamped 200 psi working pressure shall be furnished mounted and piped at the
factory. The bladder shall be made of heavy duty butyl rubber and FDA approved for
potable water applications.
g. Sequence of Operation
The system controller shall operate from two to six equal capacity pumps and one
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to maintain a constant discharge pressure (system
set-point). The system controller shall receive an analog signal [4-20mA] from the
factory installed pressure transducer on the discharge manifold, indicating the actual
system pressure. When a flow demand is detected (drop in system pressure) the
VFD controlled pump shall start first. As flow demand increases, the speed of the
VFD controlled pump shall be increased to maintain the system set-point pressure.
When the VFD controlled pump cannot maintain the system set-point as flow
increases (pressure starts to drop below system set-point), an additional pump will be
started Direct-On-Line (DOL). The VFD controlled pump shall immediately adjust
speed to maintain the system set-point. Additional DOL pumps shall be started as
flow demand increases. As flow demand decreases, the pump speed shall be
reduced while system set-point pressure is maintained. The system controller shall
switch off DOL operated pumps as required with decreasing flow.
The system controller shall be capable of switching pumps on and off to satisfy
system demand without the use of flow switches, motor current monitors or
temperature measuring devices.
h. Low Flow Stop Function
The system controller shall be capable of stopping pumps during periods of low-flow
or zero-flow without wasting water or adding unwanted heat to the liquid.
Temperature based no flow shut-down methods that have the potential to waste
water and add unwanted temperature rise to the pumping fluid are not acceptable.
8 of 10
Standard Low Flow Stop and Energy Saving Mode
If a low or no flow shut-down is required (periods of low or zero demand) a bladder

type diaphragm tank shall be installed with a pre-charge pressure of 70% of system
set-point. The tank shall be piped to the discharge manifold or system piping
downstream of the pump system. When only one pump is in operation the system
controller shall be capable of detecting low flow (less than 10% of pump nominal flow)
without the use of additional flow sensing devices. When a low flow is detected, the
system controller shall increase pump speed until the discharge pressure reaches the
stop pressure (system set-point plus 50% of programmed on/off band). The pump
shall remain off until the discharge pressure reaches the start pressure (system set-
point minus 50% of programmed on/off band). Upon low flow shut-down a pump
shall be restarted in one of the following two ways:
(i) Low Flow Restart: If the drop in pressure is slow when the start pressure is
reached (indicating the flow is still low), the pump shall start and the speed
shall again be increased until the stop pressure is reached and the pump
shall again be switched off.
(ii) Normal Flow Restart: If the drop in pressure is fast (indicating the flow is
greater than 10% of pump nominal flow) the pump shall start and the speed
shall be increased until the system pressure reaches the system set-point.
It shall be possible to change from the standard low flow stop to the optional low flow
stop (and vice-versa) via the user interface.
i. System Construction
(i) The suction and discharge manifolds shall be constructed of 316 stainless
steel. Manifold connection sizes shall be as follows:
3 inch and smaller: Male NPT threaded
4 inch through 8 inch: ANSI Class 150 rotating flanges
10 inch and larger: ANSI Class 150 flanges
(ii) Pump Isolation valves shall be provided on the suction and discharge of each
pump. Isolation valve sizes 2 inch and smaller shall be nickel plated brass
full port ball valves. Isolation valve sizes 3 inch and larger shall be a full lug
style butterfly valve. The valve disk shall be of stainless steel. The valve
seat material shall be EPDM and the body shall be cast iron, coated internally
and externally with fusion-bonded epoxy.
(iii) A spring-loaded non-slam type check valve shall be installed on the

discharge of each pump. The valve shall be a wafer style type fitted between
two flanges. The head loss through the valve shall not exceed 5 psi at the
pump design capacity. Check valves 1-1/2” and smaller shall have a POM
composite body and poppet, a stainless steel spring with EPDM or NBR
seats. Check valves 2” and larger shall have a body material of stainless
steel or epoxy coated iron (fusion bonded) with an EPDM or NBR resilient
seat. Spring material shall be stainless steel. Disk shall be of stainless steel
or leadless bronze.
9 of 10
(iv) For systems that require a diaphragm tank, a minimum diaphragm tank
connection size of ¾” shall be provided on the discharge manifold.
(v) A pressure transducer shall be factory installed on the discharge manifold (or
field installed as specified on plans). Systems with positive inlet gauge
pressure shall have a factory installed pressure transducer on the suction
manifold for water shortage protection. Pressure transducers shall be made
of 316 stainless steel. Transducer accuracy shall be +/- 1.0% full scale with
hysteresis and repeatability of no greater than 0.1% full scale. The output
signal shall be 4-20 mA with a supply voltage range of 9-32 VDC.
(vi) A bourdon tube pressure gauge, 2.5 inch diameter, shall be placed on the
suction and discharge manifolds. The gauge shall be liquid filled and have
copper alloy internal parts in a stainless steel case. Gauge accuracy shall be
2/1/2 %. The gauge shall be capable of a pressure of 30% above it’s
maximum span without requiring recalibration.
(vii) Systems with a flooded suction inlet or suction lift configuration shall have a
factory installed water shortage protection device on the suction manifold.
(viii) The base frame shall be constructed of corrosion resistant 304 stainless
steel. Rubber vibration dampers shall be fitted between each pump and
baseframe to minimize vibration.
(ix) Depending on the system size and configuration, the control panel shall be
mounted in one of the following ways:
 On a 304 stainless steel fabricated control cabinet stand attached to

the system skid
 On a 304 stainless steel fabricated skid, separate from the main
system skid
 On it’s own base (floor mounted with plinth)
j. Testing
(i) The entire pump station shall be factory performance tested as a complete
unit prior to shipment. Job-site programming shall be entered into the
controller prior to shipment (details of installation requirements shall be
communicated to the pump system manufacturer). A verified performance
test report shall be made available from the system manufacturer.
(ii) The system shall undergo a hydrostatic test of 350 psig for a minimum of 15
minutes prior to shipment.
k. Warranty
(i) The warranty period shall be a non-prorated period of 24 months from date of
installation, not to exceed 30 months from date of manufacture.
******
10 of 10
Section VI- Technical Specifications Storm Drainage Piping
SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers furnishing and installation of storm drainage piping above floor within the
building and below floor under the building to 1.5 m (5’-0”) outside the building below grade.
Storm drainage piping and roof drains shall be furnished and installed complete with all
fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.
1.2 References
ANSI A112.21.2M Roof Drains
ANSI A112.36.2M Cleanouts
ASTM C14 Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, StormDrain and
Culvert Pipe
ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C76 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Sewer,
Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe
ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic
Piping Systems.
ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with
Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM F656 Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement
Joints of Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
1.3 Coordination
Pipe lengths and dimensions furnished shall be coordinated with the lengths for the fittings,
and other items to be installed in the piping.
1.4 Submittals
Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the storm drainage
piping and accessories shall be submitted.
and fittings.
1 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 PVC pipe
a. Pipe ASTM D2729
b. Fittings ASTM D2729
c. Solvent Cement ASTM D2564
d. Primer ASTM F656
2.1.2 Concrete Drain Pipe ASTM C14
2.1.3 Reinforced Concrete Drain Pipe ASTM C76
2.1.4 Roof Drain ANSI A112.21.2M
2.1.5 Cleanout ANSI A112.36.2M
2.2.1 Service Requirements for Airport Facility
a. Interior Drainage
Storm drainage piping and fittings shall be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC), series
1000 for downspouts and drainage lines inside the building. These shall be used below
building floor and below grade to 5’-0” outside the building. The pipe and fittings shall be
homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes (except for perforations as
specified), foreign inclusions, or other injurious defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as
uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other physical
properties.
b. Exterior Drainage (non-traffic type)
Design requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM C14. Wall thickness used may be
more than but not less than the value prescribed by ASTM C14, except as affected by the
tolerance herein specified and by the provision for modified design. Manufacturers may
submit to the Owner of approval, prior to manufacture, wall thickness other than those
required by the aforementioned standard.
c. Exterior Drainage (traffic type)
Compressive strength of the concrete, and the area of the circumferential reinforcement
shall be as prescribed for Classes I to V in accordance with ASTM C76. If permitted by
the Owner, the manufacturer may request approval by the Owner of modified designs that
differ from the designs as indicated in ASTM C76. Such modified or special designs shall
be based on rational or empirical evaluations of the ultimate strength and cracking
behavior of the pipe and shall fully describe to the Owner any deviations from the
requirements of ASTM C76. The manufacturer shall submit to the owner proof of the
adequacy of the proposed modified or special design.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 PVC pipe Joints
Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the requirements as follows:
2 of 3
Solvent Welded.
All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing operations shall comply with the pipe manufacturer’s
recommendation and ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be bevelled or assembled joints. Shall be
suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the set time recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.2.2 Concrete Pipe Joints
The joints shall be such design and the ends of the concrete pipe sections so formed, that
when the sections are laid together they will make a continuous line of pipe with a smooth
interior free from appreciable irregularities in the flow line, all compatible with the permissible
variations as prescribed in ASTM C76, section 13.
3.2.3 Roof Drains
Roof drains shall be of the types and sizes indicated on the drawings and shall have threaded
or spigot outlets depending on the type of conductor pipes used. Roof drains in precast
concrete shall be equipped with suitable deck clamps. Roof drains shall be securely and
rigidly attached to the roof decks to prevent movement and shall be set at proper level for
flashing and drainage.
3.2.4 Cleanouts
ANSI A112.36.2M; provide threaded bronze or thermoplastic or PVC plastic cleanout plugs.
Testing Storm drainage piping shall be tested by filling with water at the highest level.
Openings shall be plugged as necessary. Piping shall hold the water for 30 minutes without
any drop in the water level.
3.4 Cleaning
The inside of all pipes and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill
scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be
thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative, before being placed in
service.
PVC pipe shall be measured by the linear meter, PVC pipe fittings, roof strainer, junction box,
trench drain, area drain and ceiling outlet shall be measured by the number of units installed
required as shown on the plan and detail.
******
3 of 3
Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical
Section VI- Technical Specifications Plumbing Fixtures
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
This specification covers the furnishing of materials and labor necessary to complete the
installation of all toilet and bath fixtures as shown on drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
Submit for each type of fixture specified. Include descriptions of materials, finishes,
fastenings and anchoring devices, and appurtenances.
1.2.2 Samples
Submit one of each type of accessory complete with appurtenances and finished as
specified. Approved samples may be installed in the work provided each sample labeled for
identification and location recorded.
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver materials to the site in unopened containers, labeled with the manufacturer's names
and brands, ready for installation. Store accessories in safe, dry locations until needed for
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
This specifications covers all plumbing fixtures made from a mixture of white burning clays
and finely ground minerals, the wares are subjected to a high temperature rendering them
incapable of adsorbing liquid, when unglazed, does not have a mean value of water
absorption greater than a 5% of the dry weight making it sanitary and odorless. It is than
coated on all exposed surfaces with an impervious non-crazing vitreous glaze giving it a
permanent colored finish and retains high quality gloss resistant to acids and alkaus making it
easy to maintain.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
2.2.1 Water Closets
Water Closets shall be elongated 4.8 LPF top-inlet flush valve type water closet with seat and
cover and floor flange.
2.2.2 Urinals
Urinals shall be wall-hung urinal supplied with spreader.
2.2.3 Lavatory
Lavatory shall be under the counter wash basin.
1 of 3
2.2.4 Water Closet Flush Valve
6 LPF flush valve fitting for water closet with Ø 1 ¼” vacuum breaker with brass spud.
2.2.5 Urinal Flush Valve
3.8 LPF flush valve fitting for urinal with Ø 3/4” vacuum breaker with bushing reducer.
2.2.6 Floor drain - 100mm x 100mm stainless steel.
2.2.7 Pantry Sink - 500mm x 400mm x 100mm stainless steel..
2.2.8 Faucet
Faucet shall be single-lever basin mixer supplied with complete fittings..
2.2.9 Toilet Paper Holder
Toilet paper holder with cover shall be stainless steel.
2.2.10 Soap Dispenser
Liquid soap dispenser shall be stainless steel vertical type wall mounted.
2.2.11 Hand Dryer
Auto hand dryer (AC220V/60Hz).
2.2.12 Grab Bar
L-type anti-bacterial ABS grab bar (600x600mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation shall have the same finish as the
attached fixtures. Exposed screw heads shall be oval. Install fixtures at the location and
height as shown in the drawings. Protect exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable
plastic or by other means until the installation is accepted. Coordinate fixture manufacturer's
mounting details with other trades as their work progress. After installation, thoroughly clean
exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition or replace with new
work.
3.1.2 Surface Mounted Accessories
Mounting on concealed back-plates shall have concealed fasteners. Unless indicated or

specified otherwise, install fixtures with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined
braided jute, teflon or neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shield, or other approved
fasteners as required by the construction. Install back-plates in the same manner, or provide
with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required by the construction.
2 of 3
The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of plumbing fixtures, whichever is called
for in the contract, installed, complete and accepted.
The quantities determined as provided in Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price, respectively for each of the Pay Items listed below and shown in the Bill
of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing
all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work prescribed in this Section.
******
3 of 3
Division 15 – Mechanical (HVAC)
Section VI- Technical Specifications Mechanical General Requirements
SECTION 15011 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICATION
This section applies to all sections of Division 15, "Mechanical" of this project.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings, manufacturers data and certificates for equipment and materials where
specified in each individual section, and obtained approval before procurement, fabrication, or
delivery of the items to the job site. Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade
name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions capacity, project
specification and paragraph reference, applicable industry, and technical society publication
necessary to establish contract compliance of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish.
1.2.1 Shop Drawings
Drawings shall be a minimum of 350 mm by 500 mm in size, with a minimum scale of 1:100
meters, except as views, wiring diagrams, and installation details of equipment; and equipment
spaces identifying and indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement of items of
equipment, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown
to assure a coordinated installation. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation,
maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.
1.2.2 As-Built (Record) Working Drawings
After completion, but before final acceptance of the work, furnish a complete set of working
drawings of each system for record purposes. Drawings shall not be smaller than 762 mm x
1067 mm (30 inches x 40 inches) reproducible drawings with title block similar to full size
contract drawings.
1.2.3 Manufacturer’s Data
Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's descriptive literature of

cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and
catalog cuts.
1.2.4 Standards Compliance
When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of organizations such as the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), NFPA, American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Refrigeration Institute (ARI), and Underwriters
Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
If an organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the
label or listing will be acceptable evidence.
1 of 10
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Furnish an operation and maintenance manual for each item of equipment. Furnish three
copies of the manual bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent. Furnish one
complete manual prior to the time that equipment tests are performed, and furnish the
remaining manuals before the contract is completed. Inscribe the following identification on the
cover; the words operation and maintenance manual, the name and location of the building and
the name of the Contractor. The manual shall include the names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and of the local representatives for each
item of equipment. The manual shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to
the table of contents with the tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The
manual shall include: wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and
control for each item of equipment; a control sequence describing star-up, operation and
shut-down; description of the function of each principal item of equipment; the procedure for
starting; the procedure for operating shut-down instructions; installation instructions;
maintenance instructions; lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and
frequency; safety precautions, diagrams, and illustrations; test procedures; performance data;
and parts list. The parts lists for equipment shall indicate the sources of supply, recommended
spare parts and the service organization which is reasonably convenient to the project site. The
manual shall be complete in all respects for equipment, controls, accessories, and associated
appurtenances provided.
1.4 Proposed Separation of Work between the Trades
A. The specifications describe in detail the proposed work included for each trade when the
main Contractor divides the work among their Contractors. The following summary is an
outline of the work to be “Provided”, “Furnished” or “Installed” by each of the trades included
in the contract, i.e., Plumbing & Sprinkler, (Div.15) HVAC, Building Management System
(Div. 15), Electrical (Div. 16) and other Divisions 1-14.
B. In the absence of more detailed information, consider the list as specific instructions to
include such work in the named contract.
C. Abbreviations are as follows:
1. “OD” - Other Division of the Contract (not Electrical or Mechanical)

2. “Plb” - Plumbing – Division 15
3. “Spr” - Sprinkler – Division 15
4. Mech” - Mechanical – Division 15
5. “Elec” - Electrical – Division 16
6. “BMS” - Building Management System – Division 15
7. “F” - Furnished
8. “I” - Installed
9. “P” - Provided (Furnished and Installed)
2 of 10
ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. BMS Remarks

Motors for
Cables to be
Mechl.,
determined in
Plumbing,
- P P P - - the Motor
Fire
Controls by
Protection
each trade.
Equip’t.
Feeder Specification
Cables from and drawings
Electrical - - - - P - delineate
Panels to detailed
Motor exceptions.
Controls
Wiring for
Mechl.,
Plumbing,
Fire
Protection
- P P P - -
Equip’t
Motors
including the
feeder cables
from motor
controller
Specifications
Wiring for
and drawings
Mech’l
delineate in
Equipment
- P P P - P detail the work
Motor
to be
Controls and
performed by
Alarms
each trade.
BMS Control
- P P P P -
Field Devices
DDC Field
- - - - - P
Controllers
Contractor Who
Wiring Supplied the
- P P P P P
Terminations Panel will do the
termination.
Temporary
As per contract
Light and - - - - - - Documents.
Power
As per
Temporary
- - - - - - Contract
Water
Documents.
As per
Toilets - - - - - - Contract
Documents
Temporary As per
Fire - - - - - - Contract
Protection Documents.
3 of 10

Hoisting P P P P P P
Rigging P P P P P P
Bracing of
building for P - - - - -
Safe Rigging
Cost where
due to late
installation or
Cutting, improper
Chasing & P - - - - - coordination of
Patching work is the
responsibility of
the delinquent
trade.
Includes drilling
of holes when
required.Cost
Framed Slots where due to
and Openings late installation
in Walls, P - - - - - or improper
Decks and coordination of
Slabs work is the
responsibility of
the delinquent
trade.
Sleeves P - - - - -
Waterproofing
Sealing of
Sleeves
P P P P P
through
Waterproof
Slabs, Decks
and Walls
Fireproof
Sealing of
Excess
P P P P P
Openings in
Slabs, Decks
and Fire
Rated Walls
Excavation
and Backfill P P P P P
Inside
Buildings
Coordination with
the trades. Cost
where due to late
Excavation installation or
and Backfill improper
P - - - - -
Outside coordination of
work is the
Buildings
responsibility of
the delinquent
trade.
4 of 10

Keep Site and
Excavation
Free From
P - - - - -
Surface
Water During
Construction
- P P P P P
Fastenings
Supports
P P P P P P
Concrete
Encasement - - - - P -
of Electrical
Conduits
Below Grade
Drainage - P - - - -
Inside
Building
Base Flashing
of Electric
Cap flashing
Conduits P - - - - -
by Trade.
Through Roof
(Pitch
Pockets)
Electrical
- - - - P -
Handholes,
and Covers
Finish
Painting (
does not
include I.D.
P P P P P P
marks or color
coding
specified and
provided by
each trade
Supplying list
Finished of location of
Walls and all times
Ceiling requiring
Access P -- - - - - access doors
Doors, Panels included in the
and Division
Supporting requiring
Frames same.
5 of 10

Plaster rings
and frame
furnished in
Plaster Rings electric only
I F - - F -
and Frames for lighting
fittings which
are so
equipped.
Where one
trade furnishes
and another
installs, the
Rubbish installing trade
P P P P P P
Removal removes the
shipping and
packing
materials
which
accumulate.
Special Tools
for Equipment F F F F F F
Maintenance
Electric
Power Furnishing exact
Consuming dimensions of
Items and anchors,
vibration mounts
Controls for
P - - - - - and templates
Other than included in each
Mechanical trade providing
Equipment, the associated
e.g. Motorized equipment.
Doors
Furnishing
exact
dimensions of
Concrete
anchors,
Foundations,
vibration
Pads, Pits,
P - - - - - mounts and
Curbs, and
templates
Bases Inside
included in
Buildings
each trade
providing the
associated
equipment.
Concrete Furnishing of
Foundations covers and
Pads and P - - - - - associated
Bases frames
Outside included in
Buildings each trade.
6 of 10

Furnishing of
covers and
associated
Sump Pits P - - - - -
frames
included in
each trade.
Concrete
Lined
Trenches
P - - - - -
inside
Building
Foundations
Prime Coat - P P P P P
Painting
Field Touch-
up Painting of - P P P P P
Damaged
Shop Coats
Rustproofing
Field Cut and
assembled
- P P P P P
Iron
Supporting
Frames and
Racks
Grating and
P - - - - -
Exterior Wall
Louvers
Duct
- - - P - -
Connections
to Louvers
Except
Mechanical
Equipment
and Electrical
Delivered and P - - - - -
Equipment by
Set in Place
Divisions 15, &
16.
Vinyl Tape or
Painted
Color-coding,
Banding
Arrows and
Similar P P P P P P
Identification
for
Mechanical
and Electrical
Work.
7 of 10

Responsibility
Underfloor for
and Header - - - - P - coordination is
Duct included in this
Section.
Lighting - - - - P - See Drawings

Fixtures
Power
connections to
Elevators, disconnect
Escalators and P - - P - - switch
Dumbwaiters included in
Electrical
Section.
Catwalks and
Ladders to
P - - - - -
Electrical
Equipment
Line
Food Service connections
P - - - - -
Equipment included in
each trade.
Services to
Food Service - P P P P -
Equipment
Line
Laundry - - - - -
connections
Included in
Equipment P - - - - -
each trade.
Services to
- P P P P -
Laundry
Equipment
Roughing to
equipment - P P P P -
Furnished by
Others
D. Each Division is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination

information to any other Division supplying work to accommodate that Division.
E. For items which are to be installed but not furnished as part of this Division, the
electrical work includes:
1. Coordination of their delivery.

2. Unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade
level.
3. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the
project.
8 of 10
4. Correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected.
5. Field make-up and internal wiring as indicated for their proper operation.
1.5POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Furnish approved operating instructions for each system and principal item of equipment for the
use of the operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring
diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal item of equipment.
Operating instructions shall be printed or engraved, and shall be framed under glass or in
approved laminated plastic and posted where directed. Operating instructions shall be attached
to or posted adjacent to each principal item of equipment and include directions for start-up,
proper adjustment, operating lubrication, shut-down, safety-precautions, procedure in the event
of equipment failure, and other areas as recommended by the manufacturer of each item of
equipment. Operating instructions exposed to the weather shall be made of weatherproof
materials or shall be suitably enclosed to be weather protected. Operating instructions shall not
fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected
to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as approved by the Engineer. Damaged or defective items, in the
opinion of the Engineer, shall be replaced.
1.6 STANDARD PRODUCTS/SERVICE AVAILABILITY
1.6.1 Materials and Equipment
Materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products, which are of similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years
prior to bid opening. The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials
under similar circumstances and of similar size.
1.6.2 Experience Required
The two years' experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or
is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs,
or brochures.
1.6.3 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. The Contractor shall submit a
certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which
includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably
convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment
on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.6.4 Manufacturer’s Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address,
model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
9 of 10
1.7 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts
located so that any person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or
properly guarded. High-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel
or create a fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type as
specified herein. Items such as catwalks, ladders, and guardrails shall be provided where
required for safe operation and maintenance of equipment.
1.8 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS
Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these
recommendations shall be furnished prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be
allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these
recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
1.9 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical components of mechanical equipment and system such as motors, starters, and
controls shall be provided under this Division and shall be as specified herein and as necessary
for complete and operable systems. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted.
Interconnecting wiring for components of packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral
part of the equipment. All interconnecting power wiring and conduit for field erected equipment
and all control wiring rated over 100 volts and conduit shall be as specified in Division 16.
Control wiring rated under 100 volts and conduit shall be as specified in Division 15. Motor
control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies and all
necessary conduit and wiring connecting such assemblies, centers, or other power sources to
mechanical equipment shall conform to Division 16.
******
10 of 10
Bicol International Airport Development Project
Section VI- Technical Specifications Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM B 117 (1997) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
1.1.2 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
ANSI C2 (1997) National Electrical Safety Code
1.1.3 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1 (1998; Errata 1999) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 10 (1994) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed
Frequency Medium AC
NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 1992) Energy Management Guide of

Selection and Use of Single-Phase Motors
1.1.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (1999) National Electrical Code
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to all sections of Division 15, "Mechanical" of this project specification,
unless specified otherwise in the individual section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use
for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period.
1.3.2 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified
record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.
1.3.3 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of
qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment that includes their
addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to
1 of 4
the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address,
model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of
the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
1.3.5 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be

mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears.
Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Engineer.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the
Engineer. Replace damaged or defective items.
1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of
equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall conform to and have
electrical connections provided under Electrical Section for Interior Distribution System.
Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the
equipment. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and contactors
shall have a maximum of 120-volt control circuits, and shall have auxiliary contacts for use
with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes
indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the
section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit for field installed
equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Electrical Section
Interior Distribution System.
1.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to ANSI C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified
herein.
1.6.1 New Work
Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as BMS, motor starters, control
or push-button stations, float or pressure switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and
other devices functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and
conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the requirements of the section
covering the mechanical equipment. Extended voltage range motors shall not be permitted.
The interconnecting power wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and
conduit, the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers, and the
electrical power circuits shall be provided under Division 16, except internal wiring for
components of package equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment.
When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, provide any required
changes to the electrical service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work
for the section specifying that motor or equipment.
1.6.2 High Efficiency Motors
a. High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
2 of 4
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current

motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA
MG 11.
b. High Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors shall be selected based on high

efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG 10.
Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous
ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in accordance with Table 12-6C
of NEMA MG 1.
1.6.3 Three-Phase Motor Protection
Provide controllers for motors rated one 1.34 kilowatts one horsepower and larger with
electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, under voltage,
and over voltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable
restart relay.
1.7 INSTRUCTION TO PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full
instruction to the designated Owner personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance,
including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors
shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating
theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during
the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over
to the Owner for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of
instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use
other time for instruction with the equipment or system. When significant changes or
modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide
additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.8 ACCESSIBILITY
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair
are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and
equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTIONS
3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified
herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that
the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except
that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray
fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance criteria
shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of
3 of 4
blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no
signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm (0.125 inch) on either side of the scratch mark. The film
thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the
film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system
is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 50 degrees C (120
degrees F), the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be
painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil
and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal
surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 50 degrees C (120 degrees F) shall be cleaned
to bare metal. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the
preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying
the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 50 Degrees C (120 Degrees F): Immediately after cleaning,
the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 50 degrees C (120 degrees F)
shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.0076 mm (0.3 mil), one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of
0.0255 mm (one mil); and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.0255 mm (one mil).
b. Temperatures between 50 and 205 Degrees C (120 and 400 Degrees F) : Metal
surfaces subject to temperatures between 50 and 205 degrees C (120 and 400
degrees F) shall receive two coats of 205 degrees C (400 degrees F) heat-resisting
enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 0.05 mm (2 mils).
c. Temperatures Greater Than 205 Degrees C (400 Degrees F) : Metal surfaces subject
to temperatures greater than 205 degrees C (400 degrees shall receive two coats of
315 degrees C (600 degrees F) heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry
film thickness of 0.05 mm (2 mils).
******
4 of 4
Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical
Section VI- Technical Specification Noise and Vibration Control
SECTION 15200 - NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The provisions of Section 15011, “Mechanical General Requirements,” apply to this section.
1.1.1 Machinery Vibration Criteria
Mechanical and electrical machinery and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on
vibration isolators as indicated or specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations
and structure borne noise to the building structure or spaces or from the building structure to the
machinery.
a. Vibration Isolation Application
The type of isolation, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each
specific equipment application, but not less than that given in the Vibration Isolation
Schedule, when supported on a solid, minimum 150 pounds per cubic foot, concrete
structural floor slab having a thickness of not less than 4 inches. Should vibration
isolators installed for the machinery prove inadequate to prevent transmission of
machinery vibration to the building structure or limit machinery vibration originated noise
in the building spaces to their specified noise criteria levels, the isolators shall be
replaced with units having the largest deflection that can be practicably installed, not
less than 25 mm greater than the functioning isolators up to a total unit deflection of 125
mm.
b. Vibration Isolation Schedule and Selection Criteria
The minimum vibration isolation materials and equipment required for each piece of
vibration isolated machinery shall be as indicated and selected for the lowest operating
speed of the machinery.
Table I
Vibration Isolator Equipment Schedule
Min. Static
Machine Deflection Description
(mm)
1. Chillers 25 Housed spring isolators for floor mounting
2. Air Handling Units 50 Neoprene pads for floor mounting
3. Chilled Water Pumps 25 Free-standing spring isolators for floor
mounting
4. Centrifugal Inline Fan 25 Combination spring and rubber-in-shear
hanger (suspended equipment)
5. Air Cooled Condensing 12 Non-skid type neoprene rubber pad (floor
Unit mounted)
6. Wall Mounted Fan Coil Unit 9 Non-skid type neoprene rubber pad (wall-
mounted)
7. Jockey pump and Fuel Oil Non-skid type neoprene rubber pad (floor
transfer pump 9
mounted)
8. Fire Pump 25 Free-standing spring isolators for floor
mounting
9. Generator Set 38 Free-standing spring isolators for floor
mounting
1 of 8
c. Vibration Isolator Procurement
For each piece of machinery to be vibration isolated, the machinery base, vibration
isolators and other associated materials and equipment shall be supplied as a
coordinated package by a single manufacturer or by the machinery manufacturer.
Procure isolators selected to provide a uniform loading and deflection even when the
machinery weight is not evenly distributed. This requirement does not include the
flexible connectors or the hangers for the associated piping and ductwork.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Decibels dB
Measure of sound level. Decibels are referenced to either 20 uPa for sound pressure levels or
one pW for sound power levels. dBA is the overall "A" weighted sound level.
1.2.2 Machinery
In general, the vibration or noise producing equipment that must be isolated.
1.2.3 Manufacturer
The fabricator or supplier of vibration isolation materials and equipment. For mechanical
equipment and machinery the term machinery manufacturer will be used.
1.2.4 Micro-Pascal UPa
10 to the minus 6 power newtons per square meter.
1.2.5 Pico-watt PW
10 to the minus 12 power watts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following:
1.3.1 Manufacturer's Vibration Isolation Materials and Equipment Data
a. Vibration Isolators
b. Equipment Bases
c. Flexible Connectors
d. Flexible Duct Connectors
Submit for each type and size of spring type isolator the spring outside diameter, deflection,
operating spring height, solid spring height, and the ratio of the outside diameter to the spring
height, the load to deflection ratio of the springs, and weight and sizes of structural steel
members.
1.3.2 Machinery Manufacturer's Data
For each piece of indicated machinery to be vibration isolated, the calculated sound power data
test data or sound pressure data presented as levels in dB in the eight octave bands between
63 and 8,000 hertz. Sound power levels shall be referenced to one PW and sound pressure
levels to 20 UPa. In addition, submit the overall "A" weighted scale sound pressure level in dB.
Submit the standard test procedure used to obtain the sound power or pressure data and
vibration isolation equipment size.
2 of 8
1.3.3 Shop Drawings and Design Calculations
Shop drawings and design calculations for machinery bases, rails and saddles prepared either
by the machinery manufacturer for the recommended machinery mounting or by the vibration
isolation equipment manufacturer. Drawings shall include isolator and anchor bolt layouts,
sizes, specifications. Calculated spring static deflections for each item of machinery shall be
compared with the specified minimum static deflection for each item of machinery to show that
the calculated spring static deflections are not less than the minimum static deflections specified
or indicated. Rated spring static deflections are not acceptable in lieu of calculated spring static
deflections.
1.3.4 Certificates of Compliance
a. Neoprene
b. Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Vibration isolators, flexible connectors and their components shall be designed for easy
replacement.
2.1.1 Corrosion Protection
Steel parts of vibration isolators except springs, shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A123. Where steel parts are exposed to the weather, galvanized coating shall be at
least 2 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface. Spring shall be neoprene coated.
2.1.2 Neoprene
Neoprene materials used in vibration isolators and seismic snubbers shall be oil-resistant in
accordance with ASTM D 471.
2.1.3 Floor Mounted Isolators
a Neoprene Isolation Pads
Provide neoprene pads at least 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick with cross-ribbed or waffle

design. For concentrated loads, provide steel-bearing plates bonded or cold cemented
to the pads. Size pads for not more than 3.52 kg/cm2 (50 psi) or as recommended by
the pad manufacturer.
b. Neoprene Isolators
Provide molded neoprene isolators having steel base plates with mounting holes and,
at the top, steel mounting plates with mounting holes or threaded inserts. Neoprene
elements shall be designed for operating on a straight-line deflection curve and loaded
so that deflection does not exceed 15 percent of the free height of the elements.
Elements shall be type and size coded with molded letters or numbers or color coded
for capacity identification. Metal parts of neoprene elements shall be completely
embedded in neoprene.
2.1.4 Spring Isolators and Protected Spring Isolators
Provide spring isolators or protected spring isolators that are adjustable, including, laterally
stable free standing springs with horizontal stiffness at least 80 percent of the vertical (axial)
stiffness. If included, machine attached and floor attached restraining elements shall be
separated from metal-to-metal contacts by neoprene cushions 3 mm (1/8-inch) thick minimum.
Neoprene acoustic friction pads at least 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick shall be provided.
3 of 8
a. Springs
Springs shall be securely fastened to base and compression plates and designed to
spring ends remain parallel during and after deflection to operating height. Outside coil
diameters shall be at least 0.8 of the operating height. At operating height, springs shall
have additional travel to complete (solid) compression equal to at least 50 percent of
the operating deflection.
b. Mounting and Adjustment
Provide base and compression plates with mounting holes or threaded fittings.
Adjustment leveling bolts shall be rigidly bolted to machinery or base.
2.1.5 Suspension Type Isolators
Provide hangers with suspension type isolators encased in open steel brackets. Isolate hanger
rods from isolator steel brackets with neoprene grommets.
a. Suspension Type Neoprene Isolators
Provide hangers with molded neoprene elements which conform with requirements for
"Neoprene Isolators" except that elements shall be double deflection type with at least
10 mm (3/8-inch) deflection.
b. Suspension Type Spring Isolators
Provide hangers with springs, molded neoprene spring seats, and molded neoprene
elements in series. Springs shall conform to requirements for springs of "Spring
Isolators." Neoprene elements shall conform to requirements for "Neoprene Isolators."
Provide isolators with adjustable spring preloading devices, where required, to maintain
constant pipe elevations during installation and when pipe operational loads are
transferred to the springs.
2.1.6 Vertical Stops
Stops shall be designed to be out of contact during machinery operation and to act as blocking
devices during erection.
2.1.7 Steel Equipment Bases, Platform, Rails, and Saddles
Fabricate equipment bases, platforms, rails in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel
Construction with AISC structural steel shapes of ASTM A36 steel. Welding shall conform to
AWS D1.1 Design and sizes shall be as recommended by the machinery manufacturer and as
indicated. Provide machinery bases, platforms, rails, and saddles of sufficient strength to resist
distortion during construction or when machinery is in operation. Design calculations shall show
that the maximum stress in any structural steel member will not exceed that allowed by the
AISC Manual of Steel Construction during machinery operation.
a. Support Members and Brackets
Fabricate perimeter and equipment support members and brackets of structural steel
shapes welded together to provide a full strength and rigid assembly. Provide vibration
isolator mounting plates or brackets when required to reduce mounting height of
equipment.
4 of 8
b. Rails and Saddles
Provide rails and saddles with bearing surfaces at least equal to equipment support
bearing surfaces and with vibration isolator mounting plates brackets welded in place.
Fabricate rails of one or more structural steel beams welded together into a rigid unit.
2.1.8 Flexible Connectors for Piping
Provide straight or elbow flexible connectors as indicated and rated for temperatures,
pressures, and types of fluids to be conveyed. Flexible connectors shall be designed for 4
times operating pressure at highest system operating temperature. Elbow flexible connectors
shall be manufactured with a permanently set angle.
a. Elastomeric Flexible Connectors
Provide elastomeric flexible connectors fabricated of multiple plies of tire cord fabric and
elastomeric materials with integral reinforced elastomeric flanges with galvanized
malleable iron back up rings. Provide steel restraint cables with fittings, nuts, steel
washer, and acoustical washers where elongation would exceed manufacturer's limits
at operating pressure. Elastomeric connectors shall have either tubular or spherical
configuration as required or indicated. Spherical type straight connectors shall have
two spheres. Elbows shall have one sphere, which forms the corner.
b. Metal Flexible Connectors
Provide flexible connectors fabricated of Grade E phosphor bronze, monel or

stainless-steel corrugated tube covered with comparable bronze or stainless braid
restraining and pressure cover. Stainless steel grades shall be 304, 316, or 321 as
required for the application. Live lengths shall be as indicated, but not less than that
recommended by the manufacturer for continuous vibration application.
2.1.9 Flexible Duct Connectors
Provide flexible duct connectors fabricated in accordance with SMACNA Accepted Practice for
Industrial Duct Construction and HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible
(HVACDCS). Flexible materials shall be rated for the temperatures, pressures, gases
conveyed, and atmospheric conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Vibration Isolators
Install vibration isolation materials and equipment as indicated, in accordance with machinery
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.2 Suspension Type Vibration Isolators
Provide suspension type isolation hangers for piping, suspended equipment in mechanical
equipment rooms, as indicated and as specified. For operating load static deflections of 6 mm
(1/4-inch) or less, provide neoprene pads or single deflection neoprene isolators. For operating
load static deflections over 16 mm (5/16-inch) to 10 mm (3/8-inch), provide double-deflection
type neoprene element isolators. For operating load static deflections over 10 mm (3/8-inch),
provide isolators with spring and neoprene elements in series.
3.1.3 Vertical Stops
For equipment affected by wind pressure or having an operational weight different from installed
weight, provide resilient vertical limit stops which prevent spring extension when weight is
5 of 8
removed. Provide vertical stops for machinery containing liquid, such as water chillers, boilers,
and cooling towers. Spring isolated or protected spring isolated machinery must rock and move
freely within limits of stops or seismic restraint devices.
3.1.4 Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors
Install flexible connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as

indicated. Check connector alignment before and after filling of system and during operation.
Correct misalignment without damage to connector and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. When liquid pulsation dampening is required, flexible connectors with
spherical configuration may be used. Provide restraints for pipe connectors at pumps to
prevent connector failure upon pump startup.
3.1.5 Machinery
Provide vibration isolators, flexible connectors as indicated and in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. Machinery with spring isolators must rock or move freely
within limits of stop[s] or seismic snubber restraints.
a Stability
Isolators shall be stable during starting and stopping of machinery without any traverse
and eccentric movement of machinery that would damage or adversely affect the
machinery or attachments.
b. Lateral Motion
The installed vibration isolation system for each piece of floor or ceiling mounted
machinery shall have a maximum lateral motion under machinery start up and shut
down conditions of not more than 6 mm (1/4-inch). Motions in excess shall be
restrained by approved spring type mountings.
c. Unbalanced Machinery
Provide foundation suspension systems specifically designed to resist horizontal forces

for machinery with large unbalanced horizontal forces. Vibration isolator systems shall
conform to machinery manufacturer's recommendations.
d. Roof and Upper Floor Mounted Machinery (Floor not bearing on earth)
Machinery installed on the roof or upper floors shall be mounted on isolators with
vertical stops. Isolators shall rest on beams or structures designed and installed to
prevent damage to roofs and floors caused by machinery vibration, wind, or seismic
movement and to properly flash equipment supports and enable access to the roof
surface for maintenance and repair in accordance with the SMACNA Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual, Plate 61.
3.1.6 Piping Applications
Provide vibration isolation for over 6 inches water column. The isolator deflections shall be
equal to or greater than the static deflection of the vibration isolators provided for the connected
machinery as follows:
a. Piping Connected to Vibration Isolated Machinery
For a distance of 15 meters (50 feet) or 50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater.
6 of 8
b. Equipment Spaces or Rooms
See paragraph above for piping and high-pressure ductwork connected to vibration
isolated machinery requirements.
3.1.7 Chilled, Water Piping
Risers and from pumps to and including main supply and return risers and for 20 feet of the
branch connection at each floor.
3.1.8 Water Distribution Piping Application
Resiliently support piping with combination spring and neoprene isolation hangers. The spring
elements shall provide (5/8-inch) static deflection and the hanger spacing shall be installed so
that the first harmonic natural frequency is not less than 360 Hz. The neoprene element shall
be a double deflection type, which provides a minimum 10 mm (3/8-inch) static deflection. For
13 mm (1/2-inch) and smaller pipe the first two isolation hangers of each pipe connected to
equipment shall have a deflection to the equipment isolation support static deflection. For
4-inch and larger pipe the first four piping isolation hanger supports from rotating equipment and
for 12-inch and larger pipe the piping isolation hanger supports or supplementary steel
supports, shall be suspended from resilient hanger rod isolators capable of supporting the
above during piping installation at a fixed elevation regardless of load changes. These isolators
shall incorporate an adjustable preloading device to transfer the load to the spring element
within the hanger mounting after the piping system has been filled with water.
3.1.9 Pipe Penetrations
Provide Schedule 40 pipe sleeves and tightly pack annular space between sleeves and pipe
with insulation. Provide bare pipe a one-inch thick mineral fiber sleeve the full length of the
penetration and seal each end with an exterior and weather resistant non-hardening compound.
a Duct Penetrations
Pack openings around ducts with mineral fiber insulation the full length of the
penetration. At each end of duct opening provide sealing collars and seal with an
interior or exterior and weather resistant non-hardening compound.
b. Ducts Passing Through Equipment Rooms
Provide with sound insulation equal to the sound attenuation value of the wall, floor, or
ceiling penetrated.
c. Machinery Foundations and Sub-bases
Provide cast in place anchor bolts as indicated or recommended by the machinery

manufacturer.
d. Machinery Sub-bases
Provide concrete sub-bases at least 4 inches high for floor-mounted equipment. Rest
sub-bases on structural floor and reinforce with steel rods interconnected with floor
reinforcing bars by tie bars hooked at both ends. Provide at least 2-inch clearance
between sub-bases and inertia bases, steel bases, and steel saddles with machinery in
operation.
e. Common Machinery Foundations
Mount electrical motors on the same foundations and driven machinery. Support piping
connections, strainers, valves, and risers on the same foundation as the pumps.
7 of 8
f. Anchor Bolts and Grout
Secure machinery to foundations and inertia bases with anchor bolts. Grout equipment
with base-plates, the full area under base-plates with premixed non-shrinking grout.
After grout has set, remove wedges, shims, and jack bolts and fill spaces with grout.
g. Systems Not to Be Vibration Isolated
Vibration isolation shall not be provided for electrical raceways and conduits or for fire
protection, storm, sanitary, gas, and domestic water piping systems which do not
include pumps or other vibrating, rotating, or pulsating equipment including control and
pressure reducing valves.
3.2 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
Provide equipment and apparatus required for performing inspections and tests. Give the
project Engineer 4 days notice prior to machinery sound and vibration testing.
3.2.1 Field Inspections
Prior to initial operation, the vibration isolators shall be inspected for conformance to drawings,
specifications, and manufacturer's data and instructions.
3.2.2 Spring Isolator Inspection
After the installation of spring isolators of protected spring isolators, and seismic restraint
devices, the machinery shall rock freely on its spring isolators within limits of stops or seismic
restraint devices. Eliminate or correct interferences.
3.2.3 Tests
Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, ductwork, foundations,
and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibrations and noise
transmissions to specified levels. Rebalance, adjust, or replace machinery with noise or
vibration levels in excess of those given in the machinery specifications, or machinery
manufacturer's data.
Vibration isolator, and pipe flexible connectors and flexible duct connectors shall be the
number of sets and linear meters, respectively, actually installed and accepted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
contract unit price, respectively for each of the Pay Items listed below and shown in the Bill of
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
Payment will be made in accordance with the Bill of Quantities
******
8 of 8
Section VI- Technical Specifications Insulation of Mechanical Systems
SECTION 15250 - INSULATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements," with the addition and modifications
specified herein applies to this specification.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 Manufacturer's Data
a. Insulation
b. Jackets
c. Casings
d. Vapor-barrier materials
e. Accessory materials
1.2.3 Standards Compliance
Standards compliance labels are required on each container or package:
a. Insulation
b. Jackets
c. Casings
d. Vapor-barrier materials
e. Accessory materials
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Finished Spaces
Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are plastered, paneled, or
otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.
1.3.2 Unfinished Spaces
Spaces used for storage or work areas where appearance is not a factor, such as unexcavated
spaces and crawl space.
1.3.3 Concealed Spaces
Spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings; below floors; between double walls; furred-in
areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces.
1.3.4 Exposed
Open to view. For example, pipe running through a room and not covered by other
construction.
1.3.5 Fugitive Treatments
Treatments subject to deterioration due to aging, moisture, high humidity, oxygen, ozone, and
heat. Fugitive materials are entrapped materials that can cause deterioration, such as solvents
and water vapor.
1 of 9
1.3.6 Outside
Open to view up to 1.52 m (5 feet) beyond the exterior side of walls, above the roof, and
unexcavated or crawl spaces.
1.4 MANUFACTURER’S STAMP OR LABEL
Every package or standard container of insulation, jackets, cements, adhesives, and coatings
delivered to the project site for use must have the manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving
name of manufacturer, brand, and description of material. Insulation packages and containers
shall be asbestos-free.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION
Piping systems (except buried pipe) requiring insulation, types of insulation required, and
insulation thickness shall be as listed in Tables I and II herein. Insulation thickness as specified
in Table II shall be one size greater for insulated piping systems located outside. Unless
specified, insulate all fittings, flanges, and valves, except valve stems, hand wheels, and
operators. Use factory premolded, precut or field-fabricated insulation. Exterior shall be factory
cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Pipe insulation shall conform to the
referenced publications in Table I. Insulation thickness for all types of exterior pipe exposed to
outside shall be 25 mm (1-inch) thicker than specified on Table II.
2.1.1 Flexible Unicellular Insulation ASTM C 534
The minimum density limit of 72.179 kg per cubic meter (4.5 pounds per cubic foot) may be
waived if all other characteristics of the standard are met.
2.1.2 Piping Insulation Finishes
2.1.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket
Provide aluminum jackets on exposed piping. Allow a maximum water vapor permeance of
0.05 perms per ASTM E 96, a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach units, and a
minimum tensile strength of 35 pounds-force per inch of width.
2.1.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material
Type I. Resistant to flame, moisture penetration, and mold growth. Provide vapor-barrier
material on pipe insulation as required in Table I.
2.1.2.3 Metal Jackets
a. Aluminum Jackets
ASTM C921, Type II, metallic, Temper H14, 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) thick, smooth.
b. Piping, Fittings, Flanges, and Valves
Finish elbows and curved piping with fabricated metal covers. Finish tees, flanges, and
valves with metal covers. Covers shall be same thickness and material as jackets on
adjacent piping.
2.1.2.4 Vinyl Lacquer
Two coats of vinyl lacquer finish or equivalent according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations for unicellular insulation located outside.
2 of 9
2.2 DUCTS & PLENUM INSULATION
2.2.1 Duct Insulation in Concealed Spaces for Supply / Return Air Duct
50-mm (2-in.) thick, 48 kg/m3 (3 pcf) rigid mineral fiber rigid insulation with a maximum
conductivity of 1.38 watt-cm / m²-°C (0.31 Btu-in / hr-ft²-°F) at 23.89 °C (75°F) mean
temperature as tested in accordance with ASTM C177.
2.2.2 Duct Insulation Not in Concealed Spaces for Supply, Return Air Duct and Fresh Air Duct
Mineral fiber per ASTM C 612, class 2 maximum temperature 204 degrees C (temperature
400degrees F) 48 kg / m³ (3 pcf, pounds per cubic foot) average, 50 mm (2 inch) thick, inside
the building; and 96 kg/m³ (6 pcf) average, 62.5 mm (2.5 inch) thickness double layer
construction outside the building.
2.2.3 Insulation Thickness for All Types of Ductwork Located Outside
Provide insulation 15 mm (0.50 in.) thicker than specified herein.
a. Duct Insulation Finishes
b. All-Purpose Jacket
Provide a factory applied all-purpose jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as
required by the service. Provide jackets in all exposed ductwork system including
process exhaust duct. All-purpose jacket shall have a maximum water vapor
permeance of 0.05 perms per ASTM E 96; a puncture resistance of not less than 50
Beach units; and a tensile strength of not less than 35 pounds-force per inch of width.
c. Vapor-Barrier Material
Type I for duct in equipment room and exposed areas and Type I or II in all other areas.
Material shall be resistant to flame, moisture penetration, and shall not support mold
growth. Provide vapor barrier on all HVAC supply duct insulation and process exhaust
duct (where applicable).
d. Metal and Canvass Cloth Jackets
Provide metal jacket on all exposed ductwork system and at the clean areas. Canvass
cloth jackets shall be provided on other areas without metal jackets.
(i) Aluminum Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type II metallic, Temper H14,

0.4 mm (0.016 inch) thick, smooth.
2.3 ADHESIVES, SEALANTS, AND COATING COMPOUND
2.3.1 Adhesive for Securing Insulation to Metal Surfaces and Vapor Barrier
Lap Adhesive (For Use in Building Interior Only)
Adhesive shall be of high bonding strength and won't crack, chip, peel, or shrink due to climatic
condition and applicable for the intended purpose.
2.3.2 Lagging Adhesive
Class 1 for sealing the edges of and bounding fibrous glass tape to the joints of fibrous glass
board; or for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation) or Class 2 (for attaching fibrous glass
insulation to metal surfaces).
3 of 9
2.3.3 Vapor Barrier Coating
Type II (indoor only above surface temperature 60°F) color white.
2.3.4 Weatherproof Coating
For outside applications use a weatherproof coating recommended by the manufacturer of the
insulation and jackets.
2.3.5 Flexible Unicellular Insulation Adhesive
Type II Class 1.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Staples
ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel outside-clinch types.
2.4.2 Insulation Bands
20 mm (¾ in.) wide; 0.52 mm (0.021 in.) galvanized steel.
2.4.3 Bands for Metal Jackets
10 mm (3/8 inch) minimum width; 0.50 mm (0.020-inch) aluminum.
2.4.4 Anchor Pins
Provide anchor pins and speed washers recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
2.4.5 Glass Cloth and Tape
Type I Class 1 cloth and Type II class 1 or 3 tape. Tape shall be in 100 mm (4-inch) wide rolls.
Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces per square yard. In lieu of glass cloth and tape, open-weave
glass membrane may be used.
2.4.6 Insulation for Generator Exhaust Pipe
Shall be provided with rigid calcium silicate or rigid rockwool insulation, suitable for high
temperature application, UL/FM approved with aluminum cladding.
PART 3 - EXECUTIONS
3.1 PREPARATION
Do not insulate materials until all system tests have been completed and surfaces to be
insulated have been cleaned of dirt, rust, and scale and dried. Insulate return ducts and supply
ducts to the room outlets, flexible run-outs, plenums, casings, mixing boxes, filter boxes, coils,
fans, and the portion of air terminals not in the conditioned spaces. Ensure full range of motion
of equipment actuators. Modify insulation to avoid obstruction with valve handle, safety relief,
etc. Allow adequate space for pipe expansion. Conditioned space shall be defined as an area,
room or space normally occupied and being heated or cooled for human habitation by any
equipment. Install insulation with jackets drawn tight and cement down on longitudinal and end
laps. Do not use scrap pieces where a full-length section will fit. Insulation shall be continuous
through sleeves, wall and ceiling openings, except at fire dampers in duct systems. Extend all
surface finishes to protect all surfaces, ends, and raw edges of insulation. Apply coatings and
adhesives at the manufacturer's recommended coverage per gallon. Individually insulate piping
and ductwork. Provide moisture and vapor seal where insulation terminates against metal
hangers, anchors and other projections through the insulation on surfaces for which a vapor
4 of 9
seal is specified. Keep insulation dry during the application of any finish. Bevel and seal the
edges of exposed insulation.
3.2 PIPING INSULATION
3.2.1 Pipe Insulation
Place sections of insulation around the pipe and joints tightly butted into place. The jacket laps
shall be drawn tight and smooth. Secure jacket with fire resistant adhesive conforming to Class
2, factory applied self-sealing lap, or stainless steel outward clinching staples spaced not over
100 mm (4 inches) on centers and 15 mm (1/2 inch) minimum from edge of lap. Cover
circumferential joints with butt strips, not less than 3-inches wide, of material identical to the
jacket material. Overlap longitudinal laps of jacket material not less than 40 mm (1 1/2 inches).
Adhesive used to secure the butt strip shall be the same as used to secure the jacket laps.
Apply staples to both edges of the butt strips. When a vapor barrier jacket is required, as
indicated in TABLE I, or on the ends of sections of insulation that butt against flanges, unions,
valves, and fittings, and joints, use a vapor-barrier coating conforming to Type II or
manufacturer's weatherproof coating for outside service. Apply this vapor barrier coating at all
longitudinal and circumferential laps. Patch damaged jacket material by wrapping a strip of
jacket material around the pipe and cementing, stapling, and coating as specified for butt strips.
Extend the patch not less than 40 mm (1 1/2 inches) past the break in both directions. At
penetrations by pressure gauges and thermometers, fill the voids with the vapor barrier coating
for outside service. Seal with a brush coat of the same coating. Do not use staples to secure
jacket laps on pipes carrying fluid medium at temperatures below 1.67°C (35°F). Where
penetrating roofs, insulate piping to a point flush with the top of the flashing and seal with the
vapor barrier coating. Butt tightly the exterior insulation to the top of the flashing and interior
insulation. Extend the exterior metal jacket 50 mm (2 inches) down beyond the end of the
insulation. Seal the flashing and counter-flashing underneath with the vapor barrier coating.
For chilled and cold water piping, use flexible unicellular insulation including for refrigerant
suction piping.
3.2.2 Flexible Unicellular Insulation
Bond cuts, butt joints, ends, and longitudinal joints with adhesive conforming to Type II, Class 1.
Miter 90-degree turns and elbows, tees, and valve insulation. Where pipes penetrate firewalls,
provide mineral-fiber insulation inserts and sheet-metal sleeves. Insulate flanges, unions,
valves, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Apply two coats of
vinyl lacquer finish to flexible unicellular insulation in outside locations.
3.2.3 Hangers and Anchors
Pipe insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers. Where pipe is supported by the
insulation, provide MSS SP-58, Type 40 galvanized steel shields or MSS SP-58, Type 39
protection saddles conforming to MSS SP-69. Where shields are used on pipes 50 mm (2
inches) and larger, provide insulation inserts at points of hangers and supports. Insulation
inserts shall be of cellular glass (minimum 8 pcf), molded glass fiber (minimum 8 pcf), or other
approved material of the same thickness as adjacent insulation. Inserts shall have sufficient
compressive strength to adequately support the pipe without compressing the inserts to a
thickness less than the adjacent insulation. Insulation inserts shall cover the bottom half of the
pipe circumference 180° and be not less in length than the protection shield. Vapor-barrier
facing of the insert shall be of the same material as the facing on the adjacent insulation. Seal
inserts into the insulation with vapor barrier coating, Type II or for exterior work, manufacturers
recommended weatherproof coating, as applicable. Where protection saddles are used, fill all
voids with the same insulation material as used on the adjacent pipe. Where anchors are
secured to chilled piping that is to be insulated, insulate the anchors the same as the piping for
a distance not less than four times the insulation thickness to prevent condensation. Vapor seal
insulation around anchors.
5 of 9
3.2.4 Sleeves and Wall Chases
Where penetrating interior walls, extend a metal jacket 50 mm (2 inches) out on either side of
the wall and secure on each end with a band. Where penetrating floors, extend a metal jacket
from a point below the back-up material to a point 250 mm (10 inches) above the floor with one
band at the floor and one not more than 25 mm (one inch) from end of metal jacket. Where
penetrating exterior walls, extend the metal jackets through the sleeve to a point 50 mm
(2-inches) beyond the interior surface of the wall.
3.2.5 Flanges, Unions, Valves and Fittings
Insulation (Except Flexible Unicellular) factory fabricated removable & reusable insulation
covers maybe used. For A/C condensate. drain, place factory pre-molded, precut or
field-fabricated segmented insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining
pipe insulation around the flange, union, valve, and fitting abutting the adjoining pipe insulation.
If nesting size insulation is used, overlap 50 mm (2 inches) or one pipe diameter whichever is
larger. Use insulating cement to fill voids. Elbows insulated using segments shall have not less
than three segments per elbow. Place and joint the segments with manufacturers
recommended water vapor resistant, fire retardant, and adhesive appropriate for the
temperature limit of the service. Upon completion of installation of insulation, apply two coats of
Class 1 lagging adhesive with Class 3 glass tape embedded between coats. Overlap tape
seams one inch. Extend adhesive onto adjoining insulation not less than 50 mm (two inches).
The total dry film thickness shall be not less than 1.56 mm (1/16 inch). Where unions are
indicated not to be insulated, taper the insulation to the union at a 45-degree angle. Coat the
insulation and all-purpose jacket with two coats of Class 1 lagging adhesive and with Class 3
glass tape embedded between coats. The total dry film thickness shall be not less than 1.56
mm (1/16 inch). Factory pre-molded field fabricated segment or blanket insert insulation shall be
used under the fitting covers. Install factory pre-molded one-piece PVC fitting covers over the
insulation and secure by stapling, taping with PVC vapor barrier tape, or with metal or plastic
tacks made for securing PVC fitting cover. Do not use PVC fitting cover where exposed to
weather. Limit the use of PVC fitting cover to ambient temperatures below 65.56 degrees C
(150 degrees F).
3.2.6 Piping Exposed to Weather
a. Metal Jackets
Install over the insulation. Metal jackets shall have side and end lap at least 50 mm
(2-inches) wide with the cut edge of the side tap turned inside one inch to provide a
smooth edge. Overlap the jacket not less than 50 mm (2 inches) at longitudinal and
circumferential joints and secure with metal bands at not more than 225 mm (9-inch)
centers or with screws at not more than 125 mm (5-inch) centers. Overlap longitudinal
joints down to shed water. Seal circumferential joints with a coating recommended by
the insulation manufacturer for weatherproofing.
b. Flanges, Unions, Valves, Fittings, and Accessories
Insulate and finish as specified for the applicable service. Apply two coats of an
emulsion type weatherproof mastic for hot service and vapor barrier mastic for cold
service recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Embed glass tape in the first
coat. Overlap tape not less than 25 mm (1 inch) and the adjoining metal jacket not less
than 50 mm (2 inches). Factory preformed metal jackets may be used in lieu of the
above for hot service.
3.3 DUCTS & PLENUMS INSULATION
3.3.1 Rigid Insulation
Secure rigid insulation by impaling over pins or anchors located not more than 75 mm (3 inches)
from joint edges of boards, spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) on centers and secure
6 of 9
with washers and clips. Spot weld anchor pins or attach with a waterproof adhesive especially
designed for use on metal surfaces. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel
insulation around name plates and access plates and doors. Each pin or anchor shall be
capable of supporting a 9-kg. (20-pound) load. Cut off protruding ends of pins, after clips are
sealed with coating compound conforming to Class II for inside work or manufacturer's
recommended weatherproof coating for outside work, and reinforced with open weave glass
membrane.
3.3.2 Flexible Blanket Insulation
Apply insulation with all joints tightly butted. Secure insulation to ductwork with adhesive in 150
mm (6-inch) wide strips on 300 mm (12 inch) centers. Staple laps of jacket with outward
clinching staples and seal with foil scrim kraft (FSK) tape. For ductwork over 600 mm
(24-inches) on horizontal duct runs, provide pins, washers and clips. Use pins on sides of
vertical ductwork being insulated. Space pins and clips on 450 mm (18 inch) centers and not
more than 450 mm (18 inches) from duct corners. Carry insulation over standing seams and
trapeze-type hangers. Install speed washers with pins and pin trimmed to washer. Sagging of
flexible duct insulation will not be permitted. Cut off protruding ends of pins after clips are
secured and sealed with coating compound conforming to Type II for inside work.
3.3.3 Insulation Finishes and Joint Sealing
Fill all breaks punctures, and voids with vapor barrier coating compound conforming to Class II
for inside work or manufacturer’s recommended weatherproof coating for outside service.
Vapor seal all joints by embedding a single layer of 75-mm (3-inch) wide open weave glass
membrane, 20 by 20 mesh maximum size between two 1.56 mm (1/16-inch) wet film thickness
coats of Type II vapor barrier coating compound. Draw glass fabric smooth and tight with a 40
mm (1 1/2-inch) overlap. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper
operating rods, fill voids in the insulation with Type II vapor barrier coating. Brush a coat of
Type II vapor barrier coating where required on HVAC ducts. Provide vapor barrier jacket
continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where height of projections is greater
than insulation thickness, carry insulation and jacket over the projection.
3.3.4 Exhaust Duct Insulation for Process Equipment where applicable
For exhaust ducts for process equipment provide insulation with 3.75 mm (0.15-inch) thick
galvanized steel bands spaced not over 300 mm (12 inches) on centers; or 16-gauge
galvanized steel wire with corner clips under the wire; or with heavy welded pins spaced not
over 300 mm (12 inches) apart each way. Do not use adhesives.
3.3.5 Access Plates and Doors
On acoustically lined ducts, plenums, and casings, provide insulation on access plates and
doors. On externally insulated ducts, plenums, and casings, provide insulation-filled hollow
steel panels and doors for access openings. Bevel insulation around access plates and doors.
3.4 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
Paint in accordance with Section 09900, "Painting of Buildings."
3.5 FIELD INSPECTION
Visually inspect to ensure that materials used conform to specifications. Inspect installations
progressively for compliance with requirements.
7 of 9
Table I
INSULATION MATERIAL FOR PIPING
Vapor Barrier
Service Material Specs Type Class
Required
Flexible Unicellular
Chilled Water, (Closed Cell
ASTM C524 II I Yes
Supply/Return elastomeric thermal
insulation)
Diesel Engine
Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 I or II No
Exhaust
Refrigerant (Closed Cell
ASTM C534 I or II No
Suction Piping Electromeric Thermal
Insulation)
A/C condensate
(Closed Cell
inside the ASTM C534 I or II I Yes
Elastoeric thermal
Building
Insulation)
Table II
PIPING INSULATION WALL THICKNESS (mm)
5 - 30 40-76 90-125 150-225

SERVICE MATERIAL (1/4"-1 1/4") (1 1/2-3) (3 1/2-5) (6-9)
Chilled Water Flexible Unicellular 50 50 50 50

(Supply & Return)
Refrigerant Flexible Unicellular 50 50 50 50

Suction & Liquid
Piping
A/C condensate Flexible Unicellular 19 19 19 19

Drain located
inside the bldg.
Diesel Engine Calcium Silicate 150 150 150 150

Exhaust Piping or Rock wool
Expansion tanks Flexible Unicellular 50 50 50 50

Air Separators
3.6 SCHEDULE OF INSULATION THICKNESS
The thickness of the insulation applied to pipes, ducts and equipment shall be as stated
hereinafter.
Service Location Pipe Diameter Insulation

Thickness
Inches (mm) (mm)
- A/C condensate indoor --- 19

Drain pipes
8 of 9
- Domestic hot and

Return water pipes --- up to 1 5/8” 12
- Ditto --- 2 1/8” and larger 32
- Ditto running on roof --- as above with

And in mechanical aluminium jacketing
Rooms
- Cold water running on --- as above with

aluminum
Roofs only jacketing
- Chilled water pipes --- up to 2 ½” 50
- Ditto --- 3” to 8” 50
- Ditto --- 10” and above 63
- Supply and return air in conditioned spaces --- 40

Ducts
- Supply and return air in conditioned spaces --- 50

Ducts
- Acoustic Duct Liner --- --- 25
- Range Hood Exhaust --- --- 50
-Dishwasher exhaust --- --- 38

Duct
-Refrigerant suction line --- --- 50
Insulation shall be measured by the number of linear meters actually installed and accepted to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
******
9 of 9
Section VI- Technical Specifications Fuel Oil Handling System
SECTION 15483 - FUEL OIL HANDLING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
1.1.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
ANSI B 16.3-77 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
ANSI B 16.5-81 Pipe Flanges, and Flanged Fittings
B 16.11-80 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded
B 16.39-77 Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions
B 18.2.1-81 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
B 31.1-83 Power Piping
B 31.3-84 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
B 31.4-79 Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems
Z 49.1-83 Safety in Welding and Cutting
1.1.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications
ASME A 120-84 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Welded and Seamless, For Ordinary Use
ASME A 307-84 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard

Fasteners
1.1.3 American Welding Society (AWS) Publication
AWS SP-58-83 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and

Manufacture
AWS SP-69-83 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and

Application
1.1.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications
NFPA 30-81 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
NFPA 31-83 Installation of Oil Burning Equipment
1.1.5 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Publications
UL 842-80 Valves for Flammable Fluids
1.1.6 American Petroleum Institute (API) Publications
STD 600-81 Steel Gate Valves, Flanged and Butt welding & Erratum 84 Ends
1 of 7
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This section includes all fuel oil piping, fuel oil pumps, fuel oil storage tank, fuel oil day tank and
related auxiliary equipment for a fuel oil handling system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
The submittal requirements of Section 15011, “Mechanical General Requirements", apply to the
following list.
a. Pipe
b. Fittings
c. Valves
d. Flexible hose
e. Strainers
f. Pressure gage
g. Pumps
h. Tanks
1.3.2 Shop Drawing
Submit shop drawings showing the construction detail & general arrangement of storage tank,
day tank, tank supports, spill containment and connecting piping including clearances, principal
dimensions and all component details. Shop drawings shall be accompanied by design
calculations verifying the size of structural member, structural supports fittings, rods, brackets
and other components.
a. Instrumentation and control wiring diagram
1.3.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.3.4 Welding
a. Welder's Performance Qualification Record
Before any welder or operator performs any welding the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer three copies of the Welder's Performance Qualification Record in
conformance with ANSI B 31.1 showing that the welder was tested under the approved
procedure specification submitted by the Contractor. Welders making defective welds
after passing a qualification test shall be required to take a re-qualification test. Welders
failing the re-qualification tests will not be permitted to work under this contract.
b. Previous Qualifications
Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators previously qualified by test may
be accepted for this contract without re-qualification subject to approval provided that all
the conditions specified in ANSI B 31.1 are met before a procedure can be used.
1.4 WELDING SAFETY
ANSI Z 49.1
2 of 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPING
2.1.1 Pipe
ASTM A 120, Schedule 40 black steel, ERW.
a. Threaded and Socket-Welding Fittings

ANSI B 16.11, forged steel, Class 2000 lb.
b. Threaded Fittings
ANSI B 16.3, black malleable iron, Class 150 lb.
c. Flanges and Flange Fittings
ANSI B 16.5, steel flanges or convoluted steel flanges. Flange faces shall have integral
grooves of rectangular cross section which afford containment for self-energizing
gasket material.
2.1.2 Vent Piping
Zinc-coated steel ASTM A 120 standard weight, with zinc-coated malleable iron fittings ANSI B
16.3.
2.1.3 Valves
a. Steel Gate Valves
API 600, oil service, Class 150.
b. Relief Valves
UL 842, steel or bronze bodies, corrosion - resistant valve seats, and positive closing to
prevent leakage.
2.1.4 Piping Accessories
a. Flexible Hose
Flexible metal hose, corrugate type with braided wire sheath covering, close-pitch
annular corrugations, rated for a working pressure of at least 8.62 bars (125 psig), 200
mm (8- inch) minimum live length, flanged end connections, UL listed for flammable
liquid service. Metal for hose and braided wire sheet shall be stainless steel, any type
of ASTM 300 series.
b. Unions
ANSI B 16.39, Class 150 lb.
c. Welding Filler Metal
ANSI B 31.4 and compatible with the materials to be welded
d. Hangers Supports
Design, selection, fabrication, installation, and spacing shall conform to MSS-SP-69.

All hangers, supports, rods, anchors, nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot-dip
galvanized. Hangers and supports shall be of the adjustable type.
3 of 7
e. Strainers
Single basket type, with inlet and outlet on the same center line. Cast steel or
fabricated steel body. Open area of one basket shall be 2 1/2-times inlet or outlet
piping area. Furnish one spare basket.
2.1.5 Instruments
Tank gauges, buoyant force type with direct reading dial. Thermometers shall be bi-metal dial
type with stainless steel case, stem, and fixed thread connection; 5-inch diameter dial with glass
face gasketed within the case; accuracy within one percent of scale range. Provide scale range
suitable for the intended service.
2.1.6 Protective Coating Systems For Buried And Steel Piping
a. Buried Piping and Fittings
b. Piping and Fitting: New steel pipe and fittings shall receive protective coal tar coating.
2.1.7 Protection For Aboveground Steel Pipe And Steel Tanks
Protect aboveground steel pipe and tanks against atmospheric corrosion by a coat of inorganic,
zinc-rich primer. Apply bond or tie coat in accordance with specifications of manufacturer of
prime coat and apply two finish coats of vinyl paint.
2.2 OIL PUMPS
Positive displacement type suitable for handling the type of fuel indicated. Pumps shall deliver
the required capacities indicated. Mount pump and direct connect electric motor on extended
base plate. Provide a drip pan with each pump. Use all metal flexible coupling between pump
and drive. Provide pressure relief valve on discharge lines, pipes to return line. Provide single
strainer on suction side. Motor starters on all oil pumps shall be lockable.
2.3 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANKS AND ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Fuel Oil Storage Tanks
Construct fuel oil tanks of steel to comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31. Each fuel oil tank shall
have a 610 mm diameter manhole on top, with the same diameter extension neck, and bolted
cover with gastight gasket. Tank shall include an exterior bolted ladder. Provide openings for
fill, vent, pump suction, oil return, oil level gauge. Size vent pipes according to NFPA 30 and
NFPA 31 but not less than 65 mm (2-1/2-inch) nominal inside diameter. Vent pipe shall connect
to tapping at high end of tank and shall not extend more than one inch into tank.
2.3.2 Connections to Fuel Oil Tanks
Provide the following connections:
a. Goose-neck vent caps.
b. Fill lines with removable single strainer and locking fill boxes.
c. A sounding connection, to permit entry of the gaging rod, with a locking cap. Provide
graduated gaging rod and calibration chart.
d. Pump suction lines with internal vertical pipes extending to within 4 inches of tank
bottom.
e. Nylon dielectric brushings on pipe connections to steel tanks.
4 of 7
f. Hold down straps for steel tanks with inert insulating dielectric material between strap
and tank. Protect ferrous hold down accessories with a coating to prevent corrosion.
2.4 FUEL OIL DAY TANK
Provide a day tank for generator set with capacity indicated in the plans. Construct tank of not
less than 5 mm (3/16 inch) steel plate, with welded joints and necessary stiffeners on exterior of
tank. Include connections for fuel inlet, fuel return, drain, overflow, level switches, and vent.
Day tank shall be elevated and be provided with structural support. Height of day tank shall be
determined by the engine supplier.
2.5 LEVEL SWITCHES
External float cage, mercury contact, single- pole, single-throw type. One set of switches shall
be for high and low level alarms and another set of switches shall be for starting and stopping
the fuel oil transfer pump. Arrange high level alarm switches to close on fall of liquid level.
Arrange level control switches so that the low level switch closes and energizes the fuel oil
transfer pump at a present low level; the high level switch opens and de-energizes the fuel oil
transfer pump at a present high level. Mount units with isolating valves and drains valves.
Mercury contacts shall be arranged for 48-volt, d.c. operation. Level alarm switches on fuel oil
tanks shall be Underwriters' Laboratories approved type for use on fuel oil tanks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 General Installation Requirements for Oil Piping
Install piping in out-of-the-way locations, in a manner that will minimize cutting of beams,
girders, columns, or load-bearing members. Piping shall be free from traps and shall drain
towards tank and equipment. Installation of oil piping and equipment in building shall conform
to NFPA 30 and 31, except as indicated or specified herein.
3.1.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes through walls, and partitions. Secure sleeves in proper position
and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire
thickness of walls, and partitions. Provide not less than 1/4- inch space between exterior of
piping or pipe insulation and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation and calk at
both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass,
or provide a segmented elastomeric seal.
a. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls
Provide ASTM 120, Schedule 40 or Standard Weight, zinc-coated steel pipe sleeves.
b. Sleeves in Partitions and Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls Provide zinc-coated
steel sheet minimum 26 gage.
3.1.3 Steel Piping
Steel piping 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller shall be threaded. Steel piping 2 1/2 inches and
larger shall be butt-welded. Flanges may be used for valves and equipment installation. Piping
joints shall conform to ANSI B 31.3.
3.1.4 Threaded Joints in Piping
Use a lubricant or polytetrafluoroethylene tape on male threads of screwed joints. Red or white
lead and zinc compound may be used. Piping shall be free from fins and burrs. Ream or file
5 of 7
out pipe ends to size of bore and remove chips. Attach screwed flanges by screwing the pipe
through the flange, and reface pipe and flange accurately.
3.1.5 Welding
a. Welding of Piping
Welding of joints in piping, butt welds, fillet welds, bends, loops, offsets, and cleaning of
pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI B 31.1 All welds shall be visually examined and
meet acceptance standards indicated in Chapter VI of ANSI B 31.1.
3.1.6 Unions and Flanges
Place unions and flanges where necessary to permit easy disconnection of piping and
apparatus. Each connection having a threaded end valve shall have a union.
3.1.7 Valves
Install valves in positions accessible for operation and repair.
3.1.8 Steel Fuel Oil Storage Tanks
Install storage tanks, vents and other connections in accordance with NFPA 30, NFPA 31,
recommendations and published instructions of the manufacturer, and as indicated.
a. Aboveground Fuel Oil Tanks
Fasten aboveground fuel oil tanks on a firm reinforced concrete foundation. Provide
fireproofed steel supports between tank and foundation.
3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTION
Prior to application of test pressure, remove or valve off piping components this may be
damaged by test and install a calibrated test gauge in the system. Maintain test pressure for at
least one hour. In the event of leakage, locate and repair leak by re-welding and repeat test.
Materials and equipment shall be subject to inspection at the installation site by the Engineer.
3.2.1 Piping Test
Perform hydrostatic test of fuel oil piping at 1 1/2 times system pressure or 100 psig whichever
is greater.
3.2.2 Steel Fuel Oil Day Tanks
Test tanks for leaks by applying internal air pressure and using soapsuds, linseed oil or
equivalent material on all external welds. For horizontal tanks, the test pressure shall be not
less than 5 or more than 7 psig.
Pipes, valves & other piping accessories shall be either counted or measured by linear
meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6 of 7
******
7 of 7
Section VI- Technical Specifications Chilled Water Piping Systems
SECTION 15652 - CHILLED WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications
590-81 Reciprocating Water Chilling Packages
1.1.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications
B15.1-84 Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus, Safety

Standards for
1.1.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Publications
15-78 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code : Section VIII, Division 1, 1986, with agenda
1.1.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications
A 123-84 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on iron and steel products
B 177-85 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
D 1654-79a Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens

(R 1984) Subject to Corrosive Environments
1.1.6 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications
ICS-1-83 General Standards for Industrial Control and

System
ICS-2-83 Standards for Industrial Control Devices,

Controllers and Assembles
MG-178 Motors and Generators
70-87 National Electrical Code (NEC)
Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements," applies to this section with additions and
modifications specified herein.
1 of 19
1.3 SUBMITTALS
a. Piping and Fittings

b. Gaskets
c. Valves
d. Piping Accessories
e. Instrumentation
f. Hangers and Supports
g. Pumps
h. Motors and Motor Starters
i. Air Separator
j. Expansion tank
1.3.2 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
a. Pumps (CHWP)
b. Air Separator
c. Expansion Tank
1.3.3 Certificates of Conformance: Materials and equipment.
1.3.4 Welding Submittals
As required by ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5
1.3.5 Refrigerant Submittals
a. Safe Handling Procedures

b. Materials Safety Data Sheets
Furnish for the following
a. Water Chillers
b. Pumps (CHWP)
c. Flow Measuring Equipment
1.3.7 Shop Drawings
a. Piping Layout.
b. Instrumentation and Control Wiring Diagrams
c. Pumps and Motor Starters
d. Air Separator
e. Expansion Tank
2 of 19
1.4 WELDING REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Welding Procedures
Before any welding is performed, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Engineer three
copies of welding procedure specification for all metals included in the work, together with proof
of its qualifications in accordance with ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5.
1.4.2 Performance Qualification Record
Before any welder or operator performs any welding, the Contractor shall also submit to the
Contracting Engineer three copies of the Welder's Performance Qualification Record in
conformance with ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5 showing that the welder was tested under the
approved procedure specification submitted by the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall
submit the assigned number, letter, or symbol used to identify the work of the welder, and affix it
immediately upon completion of the weld. Give welders making defective welds, after passing a
qualification test, a re-qualification test and do not permit them to work under this contract if they
failed the re-qualification test.
1.4.3 Previous Qualifications
Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators previously qualified by test may be
accepted for this contract without re-qualifying subject to the approval of the Contracting
Engineer and provided that all the conditions specified in ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5 are met
before a procedure is used.
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The piping systems as specified in this section include chilled water. Systems include piping,
flanges, bolting, gaskets, valves, fittings, pressure containing assemblies, flow measuring
equipment, flow control equipment, and circulating pumps hangers and supports.
1.6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.6.1 Refrigerant Piping Safety
ANSI 15
a. Refrigerant Handling
Follow safety regulations and refrigerant manufacturer's instructions to prevent

hazardous exposure to personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHILLED WATER PIPING, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES
Materials and dimensions.
2.1.1 Chilled Water Piping
Provide ERW, Schedule 40, black steel pipe, Grade A, except Grade B for bending purposes.
2.1.2 Fittings and Flanges for Chilled Water Piping
2.1.2.1 Sizes 6 to 50 mm (1/4 to 2 inches)
Malleable iron fittings, ANSI B16.3, threaded type, Class 150.
3 of 19
2.1.2.2 Sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and above
Steel fittings, ANSI B16.9, butt-welding type, not less than 150 psi pressure rating, or ANSI
B16.5, flanged type, Class 150, or convoluted steel flanges conforming to ASME, Boiler and
Pressure, Code Section 8; Cast iron fitting, ANSI B16. 1 flanged type, Class 125; Bronze fittings
up to 300 mm (12-inch) size, ANSI B16.24, flanged type, Class 125.
2.1.3 Unions
2.1.3.1 Unions (threaded) for Steel Pipe
Class 150 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller, or MSS SP83
2.1.3.2 Dielectric Union
Provide insulated union of galvanized steel and female threaded on end. Union shall have
water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to one percent of the
short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, insulation barrier shall be able
to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test.
2.1.4 End Connections
2.1.4.1 Steel Piping
50 mm (2 inches) and smaller shall be threaded or socket welded; 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and
larger shall be flanged or butt welded.
2.1.4.2 Threaded Joints
Thread in accordance with ANSI B2.1
2.1.4.3 Flanged Joints
a Bolting of Flanges
Material used for bolts and studs shall conform to ASTM A 307, Grade B, and material
for nuts shall conform to ASTM A 194, Grade 2. Dimensions of bolts, studs, and nuts
shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2 with threads conforming to ANSI B1.1
coarse type with Class 2A fit for bolts and studs, and Class 2B fit for nuts. Bolts or with
Class 2A fit for bolts and studs, and Class 2B fit for nuts. Bolts or studs shall extend
through the nuts and may have reduced shanks of a diameter not less than the
diameter at root of threads. Carbon steel bolts shall have American Standard regular
square or heavy hexagon heads and shall have American Standard heavy, semi-
finished hexagonal nuts.
b. Gaskets
ASTM D 2000, fluorinated elastomers, suitable for the pressure and temperature
ranges encountered, and compatible with grooves in flange faces. Dimensions for
nonmetallic gaskets shall conform to ANSI B16.21.
2.1.4.4 Butt Weld Joints
Shall conform to ANSI B31.9. The use of backing rings shall conform to ANSI B31.9. Ferrous
rings shall be of good weldable quality and not exceed 0.05 percent sulfur; for alloy pipe,
backing rings shall be of material compatible with the chemical composition of the parts to be
welded and preferably of the same composition. Backing rings shall be of the continuous
machined or split-band type.
4 of 19
2.1.5 Valves
Gate, Globe, Angle, Check, Special, and Related Equipment: Shall conform to the following
paragraphs. End connections shall conform to paragraph entitled "End Connections." Valves
shall have rising stems and shall open when turned counterclockwise.
2.1.5.1 Gate Valves
a. Bronze Gate Valves, 50 mm (2 Inches and Smaller)
MSS SP80, wedge disc, rising stem, inside threaded type. Provide solder-joint ends
when used with copper tubing, and not less than 68 kg (150-pound) class.
b. Steel Gate Valves
ANSI B16.34, Class 150, outside screw-and-yoke type with solid wedge or flexible
wedge disc, with trim of heat-and corrosion-resistant steel as recommended by the
manufacturer for the service indicated.
c. Cast Iron Gate Valves, 65 mm (2 1/2 Inches) and Larger
MSS SP70, Class 125 or 250, outside screw-and-yoke type with bronze trim.
2.1.5.2 Globe and Angle Valves
a. Bronze, 65 mm (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller
MSS SP80, Class 150 with renewable seats and discs except internal slats for solder-
end valves
b. Steel
ANSI B16.34, Class 150, with heat-and corrosion-resistant trim as recommended by

the manufacturer for the service indicated, and provided with tapped drains and brass
plugs.
c. Cast Iron, 65 mm (2 1/2 Inches) and Larger
Class 125, with bronze trim, tapped drains, and brass plugs
2.1.5.3 Check Valves
a. Bronze, 65 mm (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller
MSS SP80, regrinding- swing- check type, Class 150.
b. Steel, 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and above
Class 150 with heat-and corrosion-resistant trim as recommended by the manufacturer

for the conditions indicated.
c. Swing Check Valves
Shall have bolted caps.
d. Lift Check Valves 65 mm (2 Inches) and Smaller
Shall have bolted caps.
5 of 19
e. Cast Iron Check Valves 65 mm (2 1/2 Inches) and Larger
Class 125 with bronze trim. Provide non-slam, eccentric-disc type for centrifugal pump
discharge service.
2.1.5.4 Water Pressure-Reducing Valves
ASSE 1003
2.1.5.5 Plug Valves
Cast iron or steel, lubricated, tapered plug Class 150, Size 65 mm (2 inches) and larger, End
Connection: Flanged. Replaceable valve seat is not required.
2.1.5.6 Drain Valves
Gate valves conforming to MSS SP80, Class 150, manually operated 20 mm (3/4) pipe size and
above, with threaded ends. Provide hose nipple adapters for connecting a hose to lead to a
convenient floor drain.
2.1.5.7 Air Vent Valves
Automatic Type. The automatic-type air vent valves shall be of the ball-float type. Provide
valves with cast iron bodies, 300 series corrosion- resistant steel float, linkage and removable
seat of hardened, corrosion-resistant steel. Air vent valves on water coils shall have not less
than 3 mm (1/8 inch) threaded end connections. Provide valves suitable for hot or cold water
service and 8.85 kg/sq.m. (125 psi) minimum service pressure. Provide 20 mm (3/4-inch) pipe
size for water mains and 15 mm (1/2-inch) minimum pipe size for all other applications.
2.1.5.8 Automatic Flow Control Valves
Individually selected and factory calibrated by the manufacturer for the service specified. The
valves shall automatically limit the rate of flow of the system to the required design capacity
regardless of system fluctuations. Submit certified performance date for each valve based on
factory tests. Valves shall regulate flow within 5 percent of their tag rating over an operating
pressure differential of at least 15 times the minimum required for control. Provide tamperproof
valves with body tapping suitable for connecting instruments for verifying flow control
performance. Provide the self-cleaning, cartridge-piston type with stainless steel, variable area
orifices. Valves shall be bronze and designed for a minimum service pressure of 8.85 kg/sq.
cm.-gauge (125 psig). Valve bodies shall have threaded soldered or flanged connections as
required for pipe fittings. Furnish each automatic flow control valve with a valve kit located
outside of insulation, and hose fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments as
indicated.
2.1.5.9 Butterfly Valves
MSS SP67, Type I tight shutoff valve, and valve ends shall be flanged. The valve body material
shall be steel and bubble tight for shutoff at 10.62 kg/sq. cm. gauge (150 psig). Flanged and
flangeless valves shall have 300 series corrosion-resistant steel stems and discs or bronze
discs with molded elastomer disc seals. Flow conditions shall be for the regulation from
maximum flow to complete shutoff by the throttling effect. Valves smaller than 200 mm (8
inches) shall have throttling effect. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have totally enclosed
manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops and indicators. Valves shall have a
minimum of seven locking positions and shall be suitable for water temperatures up to 121
degrees C (250 degrees F).
2.1.5.10 Butterfly Valves 2 Inches and Smaller
One-piece and three-piece design with male or female threaded end connections and shall be
bubble tight for shutoff at 10.62 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (150 psig). Provide 300 series corrosion
6 of 19
resistant steel stem and disc assembly. The disc seal shall be suitable for the liquid used in the
system in which the valve is to be installed. The valves shall be suitable for water temperature
up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) and capable of operating at the rated pressure of 10.62
kg/sq. cm.-gauge (150 psig). Provide valves designed for throttling service use with valve lever
and indicator adjustment.
2.1.6 Miscellaneous Components for Piping System
2.1.6.1 Strainers
Class 125 Type I (single screen) for IPS sizes below 50 mm (2 inches) and Type II (single
perforated basket) for sizes 50 mm (2 inch) and above. Provide Type 304 stainless steel
element with 1.175 mm (0.047 inch) minimum diameter perforations, or Type 304 stainless steel
screen. Select perforation diameter or screen mesh number suitable to protect the particular
component indicated. Manual and automatic cleaners are not required.
2.1.6.2 Balancing Valve
Furnish and install as shown on plans, a calibrated (bronze/cast iron with bronze disc) balance
valve equipped with readout valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter.
Each readout valve shall be fitted with an integral EPT check valve designed to protect the user
from the system fluid before, during and after the monitoring of system flow. The balancing
valve shall have an indexing pointer and calibrated nameplate to indicate the degree of closure
of the precision machined orifice. Each balancing valve is to be constructed with internal EPT
O-ring seals to prevent leakage around the rotating element.
2.1.6.3 Portable differential pressure meter
Differential pressure meter and the balancing valve shall be made by only one manufacturer.
2.1.7 Instrumentation
Locate gauges and thermometers as indicated. Provide scale range suitable for the intended
service.
2.1.7.1 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
ANSI B40.1 with restrictor; located as indicated.
2.1.7.2 Tank Gauges
Located as indicated.
2.1.7.3 Indicating Thermometers
Liquid-in-glass, or dial type.
2.1.7.4 Remote Reading Thermometers
Separable well type with the insertion length and sensitive portion length of the well and socket
suitable for the piping and service intended.
2.1.8 Pumps
Centrifugal, single stage, End Suction water pumps for chilled water system shall be Type
I-General Service, and shall have replaceable mechanical seals of material and style
recommended by the manufacture for the particular service. Pumps shall have single suction
with water passage for CHW piping. Impellers shall have radial flow. Select pumps so that the
operating point on the selected impeller-curve will lie at or to the left of the shutoff side and not
more than 5 percent below, the point of maximum efficiency for the impeller. Selected catalog
7 of 19
data shall include pump speed and characteristic curves for performance of impeller selected
for each pump. Curves shall indicate capacity versus head, efficiency, and brake horsepower
for full range, from shutoff to delivery. Contractor to submit CHW Pumps hydraulic calculations
for approval prior to procurement of pumps. Calculation shall be sign & seal by a PME-
Professional Mechanical Engineer of Contractor. (As per RA No. 8495).
2.1.8.1 Pump Motors
Motors shall conform to NEMA MG-1 and be suitable for the electrical characteristics as
indicated. Provide totally enclosed type.
2.1.8.2 Motor Starters
Motor starters shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 16.
2.1.9 Tanks
2.1.9.1 Closed Expansion Tank
Provide welded steel tank constructed and tested Hydrostatically in accordance with Section
VIII of the ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code. The design minimum service pressure of the
tank shall be 125 psig. The tank shall be zinc-coated inside and out after fabrication be ASTM A
386 hot-dip process. Tank shall have drain, fill, air charging and system connections. Tank shall
be pressurized vertical floor-mounted precharged steel with integral heavy duty butyl rubber
bladder.
2.1.9.2 Air Separation Tank
Provide steel tank, designed and constructed in accordance with Section 8 D-1 of the ASME
Boiler and pressure Vessel Code and ASME labeled for 125 psig service pressure and
factory tested for 150 psig. The capacity of the separator shall not be less than indicated. Tank
shall have tangential connections, flanged type inlets and outlets. Each unit shall have an
internal design suitable for creating the required vortex and subsequent air separation, for air
release to the atmosphere and shall also have a galvanized steel strainer. Provide a blow-down
connection with a gate valve piped to nearest floor drain.
2.1.10 Expansion Joints
2.1.10.1 Bellows Expansion Joints
Type 304 stainless steel corrugated bellows, reinforced with equalizing rings, internal sleeves,
external protective covers, and ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanged end connections. Provide limit
stops to limit total movement in both directions. Cold set the joints to compensate for
temperature at time of installation. Joints shall be designed to withstand 10,000 cycles over a
period of 20 years. Joints shall be suitable for minimum working pressure of ANSI Class.
Provide single or double bellows expansion joint as indicated. Provide first pipe alignment guide
no more than 4 pipe diameter from the expansion joint; provide second pipe alignment guide no
more than 14 pipe diameters for the first guide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install piping and piping components to insure proper and efficient operation of the equipment,
and controls in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide proper supports for
the mounting of vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Arrange
piping connections to equipment so that removal of equipment or components of equipment
including tube withdrawal from chillers, pump casing, shaft seals and similar work can be
accomplished with the least amount of disassembly or removal of the piping system. Provide
piping connected to equipment with vibration isolators with flexible connections which shall
8 of 19
conform to vibration and sound isolation requirements for the system. Electric isolation shall be
provided between dissimilar metals to reduce the rate of galvanic corrosion.
3.1.1 Water Piping
ANSI B31.9
3.2 CHILLED WATER PIPING
3.2.1 Fabrication and Assembly of Piping and Components
Welding, heating and soldering shall conform to ANSI B31.9 and as specified herein. Horizontal
runs of piping shall pitch toward water chiller at not less than one inch in twenty feet. Provide
sufficient pitch to assure adequate drainage and venting. Drain valves at low points of piping
system, and automatic air vent valves at high points where air pockets would occur. All piping
shall follow the general arrangement shown, cut accurately to measurements established for the
work by the Contractor, and worked into place without springing or forcing, except where
cold-springing is indicated. All piping and equipment within buildings shall be entirely out of the
way of electrical conduit, lighting fixtures, equipment and doors, windows, and other openings.
Run overhead piping in buildings in the most inconspicuous positions. Provide adequate
clearance from walls, ceilings, and floors to permit the welding of joints; at least 150 mm (6
inches) for pipe sizes 300 mm (12 inches) and less, and in corners provide sufficient clearance
to permit the welder to work between the pipe and one wall. Provision for expansion and
contraction of pipe lines. Make changes in size of water lines with reducing fittings. Do not
bury, conceal, or insulate piping until inspected, tested, and approved. Protect materials and
equipment from the weather. Run all pipe to be insulated as shown and as required with
sufficient clearance to permit application of insulation.
Do not miter pipe to form elbows, or notch straight runs to form full-sized tees, or utilize any
similar construction. Except where shown otherwise, run vertical piping plumb and straight and
parallel to walls. Thoroughly clean each section of pipe, fittings, and valves to be free of all
foreign matter before erection. Prior to erection, hold each piece of pipe in an inclined position
and thoroughly tap to loosen sand, mill scale, and foreign matter. Before all final connections
are made to apparatus, wash the interior of all piping thoroughly with water. Blow out piping
with high pressure steam or compressed air to remove rust scale, oil, and debris. Plug or cap
open ends of mains during all shutdown periods. Do not leave lines open at any place where
foreign matter might accidentally enter.
3.2.1.1 Strainers
Provide strainers in chilled water lines to protect orifices, automatic valves, pump and
compressor from foreign materials. Locate strainers close to equipment to be protected. Install
strainers with screen drum and in the direction of flow, as marked on the strainer body.
Strainers shall have isolating service valves to permit servicing the strainer with minimum loss of
fluid. Provide clearance for removal and replacing of strainer screens. The strainer shall have
screens of ample net free area and be composed of materials which shall be compatible with
the fluid being used. Use reducer fittings for changes in pipeline sizes and strainer connection
sizes. Provide a pressure gauge with valve connection to inlet and outlet sides of strainer for
determining pressure drop through the strainer, for indicating the need for cleaning.
3.2.1.2 Pumps
Support, anchor and guide so that no strains are imposed on pump by weight or thermal
movement of the piping. Provide air vent valve on pump casing. Pipes drain outlets on pump
bases to nearest floor or other acceptable drains, with necessary clean-out tees. Provide pig
tails or pet cocks for pressure gauges on suction and discharge for water balancing
measurements.
3.2.1.3 Valves
9 of 19
Install at equipment to allow maintenance or isolation, and to establish proper and sequential
operation of the complete system. Shell and tube liquid coolers shall have fluid valves installed
so that tubes are accessible for cleaning or replacing. Provide globe valves or plug cocks were
required to regulate flow to obtain equal distribution of the gas or fluid handled. Remove valve
bonnets, where valve construction permits removal, when connecting valves by brazing to
copper tubing. Install globe and angle valves with stems horizontal where necessary to avoid
trapping of fluid.
3.2.1.4 Air Vent Valves
Provide at high points in water piping and at water coils and water heat exchangers. Isolate
valves and pipe to run off into the nearest floor drain.
3.2.1.5 Automatic Flow Control Valve
Automatic flow control valves may be installed in lieu of balancing valves and associated flow
meter, orifice, as indicated or specified for constant flow application. If necessary, increase the
system pump head to obtain the proper operating differential between body tapping for control
of maximum flow; minimum allowance 0.14 kg/sq. cm. (2 psi), maximum allowance 0.212 kg/sq.
cm. (3 psi). Verify correct flow by establishing that the operating pressure differential across the
valve tapping is within the tag range. The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable and
consist of a carrying case, instructions, hoses and connections, and a push-button, three way
valve which transmits either of two pressures at a pressure gauge. The pressure gauge shall
have a 115 mm (4 1/2-inch) minimum diameter dial calibrated in increments of 0.0708 kg/sq.cm.
(one psi) or less, and shall have a range of minus 1.041 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (14.7 psig) to plus
10.62 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (150 psig). Provide a higher pressure range gauge where system
service pressure exceeds 8.85 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (125 psig). Where the flow-rate-pressure
differential is marginal or deficient, use a portable flow meter to verify flow rate, when requested
by the Engineer.
3.2.1.6 Pressure and Vacuum Gauge
Provide a shutoff valve or pet cock between pressure gauges and the
pipeline.
3.2.1.7 Thermometers
Provide thermometers and thermal sensing elements of control valves with a separate socket.
Install separable sockets in pipe lines in such a manner to sense the temperature of the flowing
fluid and minimize obstruction to flow.
3.3 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINS
3.3.1 Condensate Drains
Shall be zinc-coated steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 120. Provide drain piping from cooling
coils to drain condensate. Trap drains at the exit point of the cooling coil and connect to the
area drain system.
3.3.2 Cooling Coil Drain Pans
Galvanized steel with drain connections and lines to remove the condensate collected on the
cold coil surface from the air stream. Pipe the condensate from the drain pan bottom to a
disposal point outside of the coil casings and trap to ensure complete pan drainage.
3.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and
other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Interlock chilled water pumps
with the holding coils of the refrigeration compressor motor starters.
10 of 19
3.5 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS
When installations of the various components of the piping systems are completed, clean before
final closing. Clean all piping and components of scale and thoroughly flush out all foreign
matter. Provide temporary bypasses for all water coils to prevent valves flushing water from
passing through coils. Clean all strainers and thoroughly. Wipe equipment clean, removing all
traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots. Maintain the system in this clean condition until final
approval. Clean and paint piping and equipment.
3.5.1 Safety Procedure
Ventilate work area, avoiding skin contact by using solvent resistant gloves. Observe
precautions and warnings on the manufacturer's product labels.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING
Except that plastic, slip-on labels or tapes with pressure-sensitive adhesive may be used in lieu
of painting or stenciling. Spacing of identification marking on runs shall not exceed 15 m (50
feet). Tag equipment, gauges, thermometers, valves, and controllers with tags of brass or
approved nonferrous material and securely mount or attach.
3.7 FIELD INSPECTIONS
Prior to initial operation examine and inspect the piping systems for conformance to plans and
specifications, ANSI B31.5 for refrigerant piping and ANSI B31.1 for chilled water piping.
Equipment, material or work rejected because of defects or nonconformance with plans,
specifications and ANSI Codes for pressure piping shall be corrected as directed by the
Contractor.
3.8 FIELDS TESTS
After completion of the piping installation and prior to initial operation, conduct tests on the
piping system. Furnish materials and equipment required for tests. Correct defects disclosed
by the test. Perform test after installation and prior to acceptance in the presence of the
Consulting Engineer and subject to his approval.
3.8.1 Water Piping
Hydrostatically test in accordance with the requirements of ANSI B31.9. Test piping system at
one and one-half times system pressure but at least 7.08 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (100 psig) with water
not exceeding 37.78 degree C (100 degrees F). Before tests, remove or isolate gauges, traps
and other apparatus in the new system which may be damaged. Repair leaks tightening, re-
welding joints. Do not calk joints renewing pipe or fittings. Install a calibrated, test pressure
gauge in the system to observe loss in pressure. Maintain the required test pressure
maintained for a sufficient amount of time to enable an inspection of joints and connections.
Correct defects disclosed by the test.
3.9 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide in accordance with the requirements in Section 15011, "Mechanical General

Requirements," including the following:
a. Piping System Diagrams
b. Codes
3.10 STARTUP AND OPERATIONAL TESTS
11 of 19
Start up and initially operates the refrigeration and chilled water system. During this time,
periodically clean the various strainers until no further accumulation of foreign material occurs.
Exercise care so that minimum loss of refrigerant occurs when strainers are cleaned. Adjust
safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to place them in required operation and
sequence.
PART 5 - VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM FOR SECONDARY CHILLED WATER PUMPS
5.1 Supply and install wherever shown on drawings split case pumps (as described before) and
of capacities as shown on drawings.
a) Variable Speed Pumping Package
(1) Pumping Skid
(2) Pump Control Panel
(3) Adjustable Frequency Drive
(4) Automatic Bypass
(5) Sensor Transmitters
(6) Sequence of Operation
b) References
(1) Hydraulic Institute
(2) ANSI – American National Standards Institute
(3) NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(4) UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(5) NEC – National Electrical Code
(6) ISO – International Standards Organization
(7) IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission
c) Submittals
(1) Submittals shall include the following:
(i) System summary sheet
(ii) Sequence of operation
(iii) Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances and

location and size of each field connection.
(iv) Power and control wiring diagrams
(v) System profile analysis including variable speed pump curves and
system curve the analysis shall also include pump, motor and AFD
12 of 19
efficiencies, job specific load profile, staging points, horsepower and

kilowatt/hour consumption
(vi) Pump data sheets
(2) Submittals must be specific to this project Generic submittals will not be
accepted.
d) Quality Assurance
(1) The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer An

assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and
construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a pump
manufacturer The manufacturer shall assume “Unit Responsibility” for the
complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall defined as responsibility
for interface and successful operation of all system components supplied by
the pumping system manufacturer.
(2) The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design
and contruction of variable speed pumping systems
(3) All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the
factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected
to AFD output and it shall test all inputs, outputs and program execution
specific to this application.
(4) The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards

Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at the
time of submittal.
(5) Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories as a manufacturer

of packaged pumping systems
(6) Bidders shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to
packaged pumping systems Any deviations from this specification shall be
bid as a voluntary alternate clearly defined in writing. If no exceptions are
noted, the supplier or contractor shall be bound by these specifications
(7) Variable speed motors shall be inverter-duty motor and shall comply to
NEMA MGI part 31 variable speed chines shall be with manual by pass for
fixed speed operation incase.
e) Manufactured Units
(1) Furnish and install as shown on the plans a variable speed pumping system.
(2) The control system shall include, as a minimum, pump & motor assemblies,
the programmable logic pump controller, adjustable frequency drive (s),
automatic bypass, suction and discharge piping and additional equipment as
specified or as required to properly execute the sequence of operation.
Furnish field installed remote sensor/ transmitters as indicated on the plans.
(3) System shall require only suction and discharge connections and a single
point power connection Field connection of remote sensor/transmitters and
connection to Building Automation System shall be by controls contractor.
(4) All components shall be mounted on a structural steel base suitable for
grouting. The base shall be large enough to support the system’s pumps,
13 of 19
piping and control panel. All welded pressure bearing piping must be
fabricated with full penetration welds. Qualification of thew welding
procedures and performance of the welders shall comply with the
requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ASME code, Section IX.
(5) Provide pumps as indicated on the pump schedule. Pumps and motors shall
be furnished as specified in respective sections of this document
(6) Pressure gauges shall be furnished for system supply and return headers
Gauges shall be installed to be clearly visible from front of control panel.
(7) Variable speed motors shall be inverter-duty motor and shall comply to
NEMA MGI part 31. Variable speed drives shall be with manual by pass for
fixed speed operation incase the VFD is not operating.
f) Components
a. Pump Logic Controller
(1) The Technologic pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and
bear the label of Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL). The controller
shall meet Part 15 of FCC regulations pertaining to class A computing
devices. The controller shall be specifically designed for variable
speed pumping applications
(2) The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards

against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
(i) motor overload
(ii) pump flow surges
(iii) hunting
(iv) end of curve
(3) the pump logic controller shall capable of accepting 8 analog inputs
from zone sensor/transmitters indicated at various position of the
piping network and as approved by the Engineer The controller shall
scan each analog input a minimum of once every 500 milliseconds It
will then select the analog signal that has deviated the greates amount
from its setpoint This selected signal will be used as the command
feedback input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize
hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of maintaining a different
set point value.
(4) The pump controller shall be capable of controlling all pumps in

parallel
(5) The controller shall be fixed expandable to control up to 2 pumps in

parallel and accept up 16 analog inputs. This modification shall consist
of nothing more than the addition of analog input modules and shall
not require the use of special tools or factory reprogramming
Controllers not capable of being expanded to this level will not be
acceptable
14 of 19
(6) The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integral-

derivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative
values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range.
(7) The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall
be displayed in plain English the operator interface shall have the
following features:
(i) Multi-fault memory and recall
(ii) On-screen help functions
(iii) LED pilot lights and switches
(iv) Soft-touch membrane keypad switches.
(8) The readout shall be two lines of forty 0.50” brightly lit fluorescent
characters capable of displaying the following values:
(i) Differential pressure in PSIG
(ii) Pressure in PSIG
(iii) Flow in GPM
(iv) Temperature in degrees F or c
(v) Differential temperature in degrees F or C
(vi) BTU calculation
(vii) Kilowatt consumption
(viii) Tons per jour calculation
(ix) Wire to water efficiency calculation
(9) The following communication features shall be provided to the BAS:
(i) Remote system start/ stop
(ii) Failure of any system component
(iii) Process variable
(iv) AFD speed
g) Adjustable Frequency Drive
(1) The adjustable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM)
type, microprocessor controlled design
(2) The AFD, including all factory installed options, shall have CSA approval.
(3) Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 ventilated for installation as a wall mounted or

free standing unit, depending on the amp rating A hand-off-automatic switch
and speed potentiometer shall be mounted on the front of the enclosure.
15 of 19
(4) AFD shall utilize a diode bridge rectifier to convert three phase AC to a fixed
DC voltage. Power Factor shall remain above 0.95 regardless of speed or
load AFDs employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be
acceptable.
(5) Insulated gate bipolar transistros shall be used in the inverter section to
convert the fixed DC voltage to a three phase, adjustable frequency, AC
output. A DC line reactor shall be provided to minimize harmonic and current
distortion of the input power line.
(6) The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided:
(i) Accel time : 01 to 1800 seconds
(ii) Decel time : 01 to 1800 seconds
(iii) Minimum Frequency : 0 HZ
(iv) Maximum Frequency:100 HZ
(v) Analog input filter :01 to 10 seconds
(vi) Analog outputs: 10 to 1 gain
(vii) Volts/ Hertz ratio
(7) Speed reference signal shall be customer selectable for 0-10 VDC or 4-20
mA.
(8) The AFD shall be suitable for elevations for 3300 feet above sea level without
derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 104
degrees F. AFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95%
non- condensing humidity.
(9) The AFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain
English via a 40 character alphanumeric display:
(i) Frequency
(ii) Voltage
(iii) Current
(iv) Kilowatts per hour
(v) Fault identification
(vi) Percent torque
(vii) Percent power
(viii) RPM
(10) All AFDs shall be warranted for a period of 24 months after shipment. This
warranty shall cover parts and labor.
Variable speed drives shall be with manual bypass for fixed speed operation
in case the VFD is not operating.
16 of 19
h) Automatic AFD Bypass
(1) Variable speed pumping system shall be equipped with an automatic bypass.
(2) Bypass shall consist of a main power disconnect with ground fault protection,
a pair of interlocked contractors and a motor overload relay. All are to be
mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.
(3) Automatic bypass shall operate as described in the sequence of operation
i) Sensor/ Transmitters
Provide 1 field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitters as indicated on the

plans. Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal indicative of process variable
to the pump logic controller via standard two wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have
stainless steel wetted parts with two 0.25” male NPT process connections. It shall be
protected against radio frequency interference and shall have a watertight, NEMA 4
electrical enclosure capable of withstanding 2000 PSI static pressure with a 0.5” NPT
conduit connection Accuracy shall be within 0.25% of full span.
j) Sequence of Operation
(1) The system shall consist of a Technologic pump logic controller, multiple
pump/AFD sets with manual and automatic alternation and pump staging with
across the line bypasses for each pump.
(2) The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer’s contact when
the pump logic controller Mode of Operation selector switch is in the REMOTE
position.
(3) When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL position, the
pumping system shall operate auto-matically.
(4) Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as indicated on the plans.
(5) Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic
controller, indicative of process variable condition.
(6) The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent,
engineer/user determined set points
(7) when all set points are satisfied by the process variable the pump speed shall
remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level.
(8) the Technologic pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare
each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied
zone.
(9) If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic
controller shall initiate a timed sequences of events to stage a lag pump.
(10) The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until
they equalize in speed.
(11) Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed
together
17 of 19
(12) When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the
Technologic pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and
continue variable speed operation.
(13) As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall
send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the
pump/motor.
(14) The operation of the pumps in the failure mode shall be started through the
pump logic controller and an across the line bypass.
(15) When in the “AUTOMATIC” mode, the pump(s) shall operate through the
AFD(s) being controlled by a signal generated by the pump logic controller
(16) In the event of a system differential pressure failure, due to a pump, AFD,
overload fault, the Pump logic controller shall automatically initiate a timed
sequence of events to start the remaining pump/AFD set(s) in the variable
speed mode. A message on the display shall indicate the fault, pump/motor, or
AFD. Subsequent failures shall initiate a timed sequence of events to the
variable speed mode as available.
(17) In the event of all AFD faults, all pumps shall be auto-matically started across
the line.
(18) When in the “BYPASS” mode, the selected pump(s) shall be able to be
operated across the line at constant speed with motor overload protection. A
solid red light shall signal this condition. All pumps shall be locked out of the
variable speed mode.
(19) In the event of an overload fault while in the “BYPASS”
(20) In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable
signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone
sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for
control.
(21) The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be

displayed on the operation interface of the pump logic controller.
(22) In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, the AFD shall
maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone
failure.
(23) PUMP, AFD, OVERLOAD fault shall be continuously scrolled through the
display on the operator interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been
corrected and the controller has been manually reset.
Chilled water pumps, expansion tanks, air separator, chilled water piping, valves and other
piping accessories shall be either counted or measured in linear meters, actually installed and
accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
18 of 19
******
19 of 19
Section VI- Technical Specifications Unitary Air Conditioning (Split-Type) Systems
SECTION 15653 - UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING (SPLIT-TYPE) SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications:
210-81 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
260-75 Application, Installation and Servicing of Unitary

Systems
410-72 Forced Circulation Air-cooling and Air-heating

Coils
520-78 Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressor

and Condensing Units
1.1.2 Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) Publications:
210-74 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
99-83 Standard Handbooks
210-74 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
1.1.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air- Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Inc.
Publications:
1983 Equipment, Handbook and Product Directory
1980 Systems, Handbook and Product Directory
1.1.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
A386-78 Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel

Products
B117-85 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
B209-83 Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
B280-83 Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and

Refrigeration Field Service
F 872-84 Filter Units, Air Conditioning: Viscous-

Impingement Type Cleanable
1.1.5 National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Publications:
MG-1-1978 (Rev. 82) Motors and Generators
ICS-1978 (Rev. 83) Industrial Controls, Devices, Controllers and Assembles
1 of 8
70-81 National Electrical Code
90A-81 Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
1.1.7 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publications
109-78 Tube Fittings for Flammable and Combustible Fluid Refrigeration

Services and Marine Use
873-79 Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
900-77 Air Filters
Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements", with the following additions and
modifications, applies.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
The work includes the following:
a. Indoor and outdoor unit

b. Refrigerant piping and piping accessories
1.4 SUBMITTALS
The Engineer shall submit all other items for approval.
a. FCU (Wall Mounted Type)

b. ACCU
c. Refrigeration piping & accessories
1.4.2 Certified Test Reports
a. Split type AC Unit

b. Fans/Blowers Data
a. Split Type AC Unit
1.4.4 Posted Operating Instructions
a. Unitary Air Conditioning System
1.4.5 Manufacturer's Recommended Procedures
a. Installation, including evacuation and charging procedures
b. Start-up and initial operation
2 of 8
1.4.6 Report of Start-Up and Initial Readings
1.5 CORROSION PREVENTION
Unless specified otherwise, equipment fabricated from ferrous metals that do not have a zinc
coating conforming to ASTM A386 or a duplex coating of zinc and paint shall be treated for
prevention of rust with a factory coating or paint system that will withstand 125 hours in a
salt-spray fog test except that equipment located outdoors shall be tested for 500 hours. The
salt spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117 using a 20 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the coating shall show no signs of blistering,
wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, and the specimen shall show no signs of rust
creepage beyond 3 mm on either side of the scratch mark. The film thickness of the factory
coating or paint system applied on the equipment shall be not less than film thickness used on
the test specimen.
1.6 SAFETY STANDARDS
1.6.1 Design, Manufacture and Installation of Mechanical Refrigeration Equipment
ASHRAE 15-78
1.6.2 Machinery Guards
Fully guard drives mechanisms, or other moving parts in accordance with ANSI B15.1.
Provide guards fabricated of steel and expanded metal, rigidly mounted, and readily removed
without disassembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The air conditioning system shall be designed, constructed, and rating tested in accordance
with ARI Standard 430.Units shall be ARI certified.
2.2 PERFORMANCE RATING
Cooling capacity of unit shall meet the total heat requirements indicated. Submittal shall include
catalog selection data, which accounts for entering air conditions at evaporator, and condenser
air conditions.
2.3 AIR CONDITIONERS, SPLIT TYPE
The air conditioning system shall consist of evaporator-blower unit and remote air-cooled
condensing unit. The separate assemblies shall be design to be used together and ratings shall
be based on the use of the matched assemblies. Provide performance diagrams for units with
capacities not certified by ARI to demonstrate that the components of the air conditioning
system furnished will satisfy the capacity requirement specified or indicated on the drawings.
Performance factors (BTU/HR cooling/watt input) shall not be less than 8.0 when tested in
accordance with ARI Standard 360. Submit data to demonstrate that the units will produce the
performance factors specified.
2.3.1 Evaporator Fan
Fans shall conform to AMCA 210, and shall be forward curve centrifugal type specifically
designed and suitable for the operating pressure. Fan for free blow type with variable speed and
smaller cooling capacity shall be direct motor drive. Fan shaft shall not pass through their first
critical speed when units come up to rated RPM. Units shall have either greasable or
permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings. Fan assemblies shall be statically balanced in the
fan housing and final assembly. Fan motors shall conform to NEMA MG-1.
3 of 8
2.3.2 Compressors
Provide hermetic type conforming to ARI 520, provided with all the minimum standard
equipment and accessories listed therein. Compressors shall start unloaded. Provide
compressor with devices to protect the compressor from short-cycling when shut-down by
safety controls. Provide a pump-down cycle of the non-recycling start type for each compressor.
Provide compressors with vibration isolators & crankcase heaters. Compressor motor shall be
suitable for electric power characteristics as indicated. Motor shall conform to NEMA MG-1.
Motor starters shall conform to NEMA ICS. Motors shall be constant speed, squirrel-cage
induction, open type or hermetically sealed, low-starting current, high-torque type.
2.3.3 Coils
a. Cooling Coils
Direct Expansion Refrigerant Type with evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically
bonded to copper tubes designed for 1379 kPa (200 psi) and 104 degree C (220 0F).
Provide drain pan under cooling coil, easily removable for cleaning with drain
connection.
b. The air-cooled condenser coil shall be extended-surface fin-and-tube type with

seamless aluminum tubes and aluminum fins, on condensers with all aluminum
construction, aluminum alloy conforming to ASTM B210, alloy 1100, shall be used for
the tubes, and aluminum alloy conforming to chemical requirements of ASTM B209,
alloy 7072, shall be used for fins and sheets. Fins shall be soldered or mechanically
bonded to tubes and installed in a metal casing. Coils shall be air tested under water
for leakage. After testing, dry coils for remote type units to remove free moisture, and
cap to prevent entrance of foreign matter. Evacuate and seal coils at the factory.
2.3.4 Controls
a. Condenser Head Pressure Controls
Provide head pressure control to insure condensing temperature for proper system
operation at all ambient temperatures down to 4.4C (40F).
Air Volume Control: Solid-state variable speed fan motor controller shall be provided to
control air-flow over coil. Condensers with multiple fans may be provided with fan
cycling control to cycle one of two fans, two of three fans, or four of six fans in response
to outdoor ambient temperature. Control shall be set for a minimum of 95 degrees F
saturated refrigerant condensing temperature.
b. Condenser Start-Up Control
Provide condenser with a start-up control package, which permits start-up of

compressor regardless of low ambient temperatures. Package shall temporarily
bypass system low pressure-start to permit start-up whenever minimum ambient
temperature is below design evaporator coil suction temperature.
2.3.5 Refrigerant Circuits
Entire refrigerant circuit shall be dehydrated, purged, tested and holding charged with refrigerant
at the factory. Field oil charge shall be the full amount required for operation.
2.3.6 Corrosion Protection
Units shall be factory corrosion protected in accordance with paragraph entitled, Corrosion
Prevention.
4 of 8
2.3.7 Temperature Control
Temperature controls shall conform to standard comfort cooling condition of the offices, Arrival
and Departure Halls and other conditioned spaces.
2.3.8 Fans
Statically and dynamically balanced, with air capacities horsepower, fan types, fan
arrangement, and pressure ratings as indicated. Fan bearing life shall be minimum 200,000
hours at operating conditions. Provide guard (bird) screens for outdoor inlets and outlets.
Equip with automatic back-draft damper where indicated. Housing and fan wheel shall be
aluminum or steel.
2.4 WINDOW AIR CONDITIONERS
Units shall be removable from inside the building for servicing without removing the outside
cabinet. Outside cabinet of the unit, including metal grille to protect the condenser coil shall
be zinc-coated steel or aluminum. Steel and zinc-coated surfaces shall receive at least one
coat or primer and manufacturer standard factory applied enamel. The cabinet or chassis
shall be insulated to prevent dripping and running off of moisture. All mounting hardware
shall be made of corrosion-resistant material or protected by a corrosion-resistant finish. Air
filter shall be of permanent washable type easily removable without the use of tools and
arranged to filter both room and ventilating air. Exhaust or fresh air intake shall be arranged
so that it can take place simultaneously with cooling. Condensate shall be removed by
means of drain or by evaporation and diffusion. Each unit shall be provided with metal or
plastic mounting flanges on each side, top, and bottom of unit. Provide aluminum or shop
painted zinc-coated steel flanged telescopic wall sleeve suitable for thru-the-wall installation
of window model air conditioning units furnished. Wall sleeve shall be designed to restrict
driving rain. Wall sleeve shall be mounted with means for vibration isolation. Minimum
cooling capacity of each unit shall be not less than that indicated
2.4.1 Units for Operation on 208 or 230 Volts
Minimum EER shall be 0.8 Btu per hour output per watt input. Provide each unit with a 3-
wire cord of manufacturer’s standard length. If not existing, provide a receptacle within reach
of the standard length cord. Cord shall have 14-, 20-, or 30 amps. 3-pole, 250-volt ground
type plug to match receptacle.
2.4.2 Controls
Manual and automatic controls shall be mounted in the cabinet and externally operable.
Manual controls shall permit operation of either the fan or the fan refrigerating equipment.
The fan control shall provide two fan speed settings. Automatic controls shall include a
thermostat for controlling the air temperature. The thermostat shall have an adjustable range,
including 22.22 degrees to 27 degrees C (72 degrees to 80 degrees F) and shall
automatically turn the refrigeration system on or off to maintain the pre-selected temperature
within plus or minus 4 degrees F.
2.5 CLEANING, PAINTING, AND IDENTIFICATION
Cleaning, painting, and identification of piping shall be as specified under Section 09910,
"Painting of Building (Field Painting)".
2.6 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES
Provide equipment, gages, thermometers, valves, and controllers with tags numbered and
stamped for their use. Plates and tags shall be of brass or suitable nonferrous material,
securely mounted or attached. Minimum letter and numeral size shall be 3 mm.
5 of 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Application and installation practices for unitary air-conditioning systems shall conform to the
requirements of ARI 260.
3.1.1 General
Install equipment and components in a manner to insure proper and sequential operation of the
equipment and its control. Installation of equipment not covered herein or in the manufacturer's
representative. Provide proper foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories,
appurtenances, piping and controls including, but not limited to, supported vibration isolators,
stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Foundations for equipment shall conform to
equipment manufacturer's recommendation, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Set
anchor bolts and sleeves accurately using properly constructed templates. Anchor bolts shall
be of adequate length and provided with welded-on plates on the head end embedded in the
concrete. Level equipment bases, using jacks or steel wedges, and neatly grouted-in with a
non-shrinking type of mortar grout. Locate equipment so that working space is available for all
necessary servicing such as shaft removal, disassembling compressor cylinders and pistons,
replacing or adjusting drives, motors, or shaft seals, access to water valves and head of shell
and tube equipment, tube cleaning or replacement, access to automatic controls, refrigerant
charging, lubricator, oil draining and working clearance under overhead lines. Provide electric
isolation between dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion.
3.1.2 Air Conditioning System
Install system as indicated, in accordance with the requirements of ASHRAE 15-78, and as
recommended in the manufacturer's installation and operational instructions.
3.1.3 Electrical Work
Electric motor driven equipment specified herein shall be provided complete with motors,
motor starters, and controls. Electrical equipment and wiring shall be provided with complete
"Interior Wiring Systems". Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized
thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control
specified. Provide manual or automatic control and protective devices required for the
operation, herein specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not
indicated.
3.1.4 Refrigerant Piping
Piping and fitting installation shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1. Pipe shall be
cut accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and worked into place without
springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or
other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted
without written approval. Pipe or tubing shall be cut square, shall have burrs removed by
reaming, and shall permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to the
building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings,
except that bending of pipe 100 mm (4 inches) and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe
bender is used and wide weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar
construction to form elbows or tees will not be permitted. The centerline radius of bends shall
not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks wrinkles, flattening, or other
malformations will not be accepted. Piping shall be installed 4 mm per m (1/2 inch per 10 feet)
of pipe in the direction of flow to ensure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines
or equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep moisture, dirt, or
other foreign material out of the system. Piping shall remain capped until installation.
Equipment piping shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
recommendations and the contract drawings. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit
6 of 8
into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement,
entry, servicing, and maintenance.
3.1.5 Fans
Installation shall conform to NFPA 91, and SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction
Standards, and SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. Provide
mounting and supports for equipment and accessories, including structural supports, hangers,
vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, and dampers. Install
accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
a. Installation of Supports
b. Selection
Selection of equipment support system shall take into account the best practice
recommendations and requirements of SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction
Standards, SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and NEFA
91; location and precedence of work under other sections; interferences of various
piping and electrical work; facility equipment; building configuration; structural and
safety factor requirements; vibrations and imposed loads under normal and abnormal
service conditions. Indicated support sizes, configurations, and spacing are the
minimal type of supporting component required for normal loads. Where installed loads
are excessive for the normal support spacing, provide heavier duty components or
reduce the element spacing. After system start-up, replace or correct support
elements, which vibrate and cause noise or possible fatigue failure. Exercise special
care to prevent cascading failure.
3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
3.2.1 Tests
All tests shall be performed and the Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment required
for test. Tests after installation and prior to acceptance shall be performed in the presence of
the Engineer and subject to his approval. Equipment and material certified as having been
successfully tested by the manufacturer in accordance with referenced specifications and
standards will not require retesting before installation. Equipment and materials not tested at
the place of manufacturer will be tested before or after installation, as applicable, where
necessary to determine compliance with referenced specifications and standards.
a. Leak Testing
Upon completion of installation of the air conditioning equipment, test all factories as
well as field refrigerant piping with an electronic-type leak detector to acquire leak tight
refrigerant systems. If leaks are detected at the time of installation or during the
guarantee period, remove the entire refrigerant charge from the system, correct the
leaks and retest the system.
b. Evacuation, Dehydration, and Charging
After system is found to be without leaks, evacuate the system using a reliable gage
and a vacuum pump capable of pulling a vacuum of at least 1 mm Hg absolute.
Evacuate system in strict accordance with the triple-evacuation and blotter method or in
strict accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed instructions. System leak
testing, evacuation, dehydration, and charging with refrigerant shall comply with the
requirements contained in ARI Standard 260.
7 of 8
c. Start-Up and Operation Tests
Follow the manufacturer's start-up and initial operation procedures and place the
system under all modes of operation to ensure that it is functioning correctly. Adjust
safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to ensure proper operation and
sequence. Initial operation period shall be not less than 8 hours.
d. Performance Tests
Upon completion of evacuation, charging, start-up, final leak testing, and proper
adjustment of controls, the system shall be performance tested to demonstrate that it
complies with the performance and capacity requirements of the specifications and
plans. Test the system for not less than 8 hours, during which time hourly readings
shall be recorder. At the end of the test period, the readings shall be averaged and the
average shall be considered to be the system performance.
Indoor unit and outdoor unit, refrigerant piping and other piping accessories shall be either
counted or measured in linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
******
8 of 8
Section VI- Technical Specifications Air-Cooled Water Chillers
SECTION 15682 - AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
a. Chillers
b. Charge of refrigerant and oil
c. Controls and control connections
d. Chilled water connections
e. Starters
f. Electrical power connections
1.2 SUBMITTALS
a. Submit drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings,

required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate accessories
where required for a complete system.
b. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories,
electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.
c. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
a. Submit operation data.
b. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, controls, and accessories.
c. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
a. Conform to ANSI/ARI 590 or ANSI/ARI 550.
b. Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 8 for construction and testing of water chillers.
c. Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of water chillers.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
a. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and

transporting units.
b. Protect units from physical damage. Factory coil shipping covers shall be kept in place
until installation.
c. Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 203 degrees F (95 degrees C) storage
temperatures in the control compartment for an indefinite period of time.
1.6 WARRANTY
a. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment,
whichever comes first.
1 of 6
b. Provide five-year warranty for replacement compressors including materials and labor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED AIR COOLED CHILLERS
2.1.1 General Unit Description
Provide factory assembled, designed and tested air-cooled liquid chillers consisting of helical
rotary screw compressors, condenser, evaporator, thermal or electronic expansion valve,
refrigeration accessories, starter, and control panel. Construction and ratings shall be in
accordance with ANSI/ARI 550.
2.1.2 Compressors
a. Construct multiple rotary screw compressors with heat treated forged steel or ductile
iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent
gas leakage, discharge valves, and sealing surface immersed in oil. Rotors shall be of
high-grade steel or cast iron alloy.
b. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.
c. Provide oil lubrication system with oil charging valve and oil filter to
ensure adequate lubrication during starting, stopping, and normal operation.
d. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of suction

capacity control slide valve (rotary). Use lifting mechanism operating by oil pressure.
Compressor must start unloaded for soft start on motors.
e. Provide constant speed 1800 rpm compressor motor, suction gas cooled with solid-
state sensor and electronic winding overheating protection, designed for across the line
or star delta starting. Furnish with starter. Compressor motor power factor shall be .90
or greater. If the compressor motor power factor is less than 0.90, power factor
correction capacitors must be installed.
f. Provide crankcase heater to evaporate refrigerant returning to crankcase during

shutdown. Energize heater when compressors is not operating.
g. Refrigerants shall be ozone friendly of the HCFCs or the HFCs-134A type. CFCs will
not be accepted.
2.1.3 Evaporators
a. Provide shell and tube type evaporator, seamless or welded steel construction with cast
iron or fabricated steel heads; seamless internally finned copper
tubes, roller expanded into tube sheets. Copper tubes shall be removable from each
end by removing cover plates or head.
b. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 300 psig (2,068 kPa) working pressure and
water side for 25 psig (1,482 kPa) working pressure, in accordance with ANSI/ASME
SEC 8.
c. Insulate with 0.75-inch (20 mm) minimum thick flexible elastomeric rubber closed cell
insulation with maximum K value of 0.26
d. Provide water drain connection, vent and fittings for factory installed leaving water
temperature control and low temperature cutout sensors.
2 of 6
e. Water connection shall be victaulic. Evaporator shall have only one entering and one
leaving connection. If manufacturer shall provide manifold and pressure gauges to
ensure equal flow is provided to each evaporator.
2.1.4 Condenser
Extended-surface fin-and-tube type condenser construction. Condenser coils shall be

constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. Fins shall be hydraulically or mechanically
bonded to tubes and installed in a metal casing. Coils shall be circuited and sized for a
minimum of minus 15 degrees C (5 degrees F) sub-cooling and full pump down capacity.
Provide a coating as specified in the paragraph entitled "Coatings for Finned Tube Coils."
Coils to be coated shall be part of the manufacturer's standard product for the capacities and
ratings indicated and specified. Fins shall be plate type.
2.1.5 Enclosures
a. House components in 12 gauges galvanized steel frame and mounted on welded

structural steel base. Hot dip galvanized steel frame coating shall be UL recognized
as G90-U, UL Guide No.DTHW2.
b. Unit panels and control panels shall be finished with a baked on powder plant. Control
panel doors shall have door stays. Paint system shall meet the requirements for
outdoor equipment of federal government policies.
c. Provide factory mounted 4 inch square, heavy wire mesh access guards that covers
the service area beneath the condenser coils.
d. Mount starters and disconnects in weatherproof panel provided with full access doors.
Provide lockable disconnect operating handle external to panel and clearly visible from
outside of unit indicating if power is on or off.
e. Casings fabricated from steel that do not have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM
A123 or ASTM A525 shall be treated for the prevention of corrosion with a factory
coating or paint system. The coating or paint system shall withstand 500 hours in a
salt spray fog test in accordance with ASTM B117. Each specimen shall have a
standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D1654. Upon completion of exposure, the
coating or paint system shall be evaluated and rated in accordance with procedures A
and B of ASTM D1654. The rating of failure at the scribe mark shall not be less than
six (average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch). The rating of unscribed area shall
not be less than ten (no failure). Thickness of coating or paint system on the actual
equipment shall be identical to that on the test specimens with respect to materials,
conditions of application, and dry film thickness.
2.1.6 Refrigerant Circuit
a. All units shall have an independent refrigeration circuits, each with one compressor on
each circuit.
b. Provide for each refrigerant circuit:
(1) Liquid line shutoff valve.

(2) Filter dryer (replaceable core type).
(3) Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
(4) Electronic or thermal expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure.
(5) Charging valve.
(6) Discharge and oil line check valves.
(7) Compressor suction and discharge service valves.
(8) High side pressure relief valve.
(9) Full operating charge service valves.
(10) Unit factory leak tested at 200 psig.
3 of 6
c. Capacity Modulation: Provide capacity modulation by either slide valve or un-loader valves.
Unit shall be capable of operation down to 15 percent. In the event a manufacturer cannot
provide unit with modulation down to 15 percent hot gas bypass must be provided.
2.1.7 Controls
a. On chiller, mount weatherproof control panel, containing starters, power and control
wiring, molded case disconnect switch (UL approved) with external lockable operator
handle, factory wired with terminal block power connection. Provide single point
power connection on units with MCA less than 500 amps.
b. For each compressor, provide across-the-line starter on 460-volt applications.
c. Provide the following safety controls with indicating lights or diagnostic readouts.
(1) Low chilled water temperature protection.

(2) High refrigerant pressure.
(3) Low oil flow protection.
(4) Loss of chilled water flow.
(5) Contact for remote emergency shutdown.
(6) Loss of refrigerant charge protection.
(7) Motor current overload.
(8) Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing.
(9) Over/undue voltage.
(10) Failure of water temperature sensor used by controller.
(11) Compressor status (on or off).
d. Provide the following operating controls:
(1) Eight or more step leaving chilled water temperature controller which cycles
compressors and activates slide valve based on PI algorithms. If manufacturer
is unable to prove at least eight steps unloading, providing hot gas bypass shall
be required.
(2) A Five minute solid state anti-recycle timer to prevent compressor from short
cycling. If a greater than 5-minute solid-state anti-recycle timer is provided, hot
gas bypass shall be provided to insure accurate temperature control in light
load applications.
(3) Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water
temperature to prevent nuisance trip out.
(4) High ambient un-loader pressure stat unloads compressors to keep head
pressure under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance trip out on
days when outside ambient is above design.
(5) Compressor current sensing un-loader unit that unloads to help prevent current
overload nuisance trip-out.
(6) Auto lead-lag functions that constantly evens out running hours and
compressors starts automatically. If manufacturer can not provide this function
then cycle counter and hour meter shall be provided for each compressor so
Owner can be instructed by the Contractor on how to manually change lead-lag
on compressors and even out compressor starts running hours.
(7) Condenser fan sequencing which automatically cycles fans in response to

ambient, condensing pressure and expansion valve pressure differential
thereby optimizing unit efficiency.
4 of 6
e. Provide pre-piped gauge board with pressure gauges for suction and discharge
refrigerant pressures on digital display of pressure on microprocessor.
f. Provide ammeters for each compressor or digital display of percent RLA on

microprocessor.
g. Provide remote mounted alarm and display panel with a minimum of the following
features:
(1) Leaving chilled water temperature set-point adjustment.

(2) Display diagnostic in 2.8 C.
(3) Display entering and leaving water temperatures.
(4) Display active chilled water and current limit set point.
(5) Display ambient temperatures.
(6) Display parts failures
(i) Water temperature and ambient temperature sensors

(ii) Motor contactors
(iii) Unit controller
(iv) Condenser and evaporator refrigerant temperature sensors.
2.2 DDC SEQUENCING PANEL
a. General: A microprocessor based control panel shall provide chiller plant control. The
control panel shall be factory programmed and require only minimal configuration at the
job site. The chiller sequencing software shall incorporate the following features and
strategies.
b. Piping System: The sequencing panel shall support single system pump.
c. System Enable: System start shall be initiated by a generic BAS System through the
closure of a set binary contact or by the operator from the DDC Sequencing panel
key pad.
d. Set-point Control: The system chilled water set point shall be operator adjustable
through the panel keypad and display.
e. Chilled Water Reset: The sequencing panel software shall provide the option of either
load based or ambient based chilled water reset.
f. Soft Loading: A soft loading function shall prevent start of a lag chiller during initial
chilled water loop pull-down for twice the normal delay.
g. Failure Recovery: On failure of the lead chiller, the lag chiller shall be enabled and
remain enabled until the lead chiller is back on line.
h. User Interface: The user shall access the system through the panel keypad and display.
System security can be added to prevent unauthorized access to the panel control
capabilities.
i. User Display/Adjustments: In addition to setup parameters, the user shall be able to

view and edit (if applicable) the following system information through the panel keypad
and display:
(1) System supply water temperature

(2) System returns water temperature
(3) Active system set point
(4) Chiller 1 status (Auto/Manual)
(5) Chiller 2, 3, 4 Status (Auto/Manual)
(6) System Enable (Auto/Stop)
5 of 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
a. Supply service of factory-trained representative for a period of 5 days to supervise

testing, startup, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner.
b. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil.
c. Manufacturer to regularly inspect the installation and to check if the work related to the
chiller installation is in accordance to their recommended installation
Air cooled chillers shall be counted in sets actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
contract unit price, of the Pay Item listed below and shown in the Bill of Quantities, which
price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,
including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
******
6 of 6
Section VI- Technical Specifications Air Handling and Distribution Equipment
SECTION 15856 - AIR HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications
410-81 Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating

Coils
430-85 Central-Station Air Handling Units
440-84 Room Fan-Coil Air-Conditioners
880-83 Air Terminals
1.1.2 Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Publications
210-85 Laboratory Method of Testing Fans for Rating
220-82 Test Method for Air Curtain Units
A 123-84 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products
B 117-85 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
1.1.4 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications
ICS 2-83 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and

(Rev. 1-84) Assemblies
ICS 6-83 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

(Rev. 2-86)
MG 1-78 Motors and Generators

(Including Rev. 1
through Rev. 8)
90A-85 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems
883-80 Fan-Coil Units and Room Fan-Heater Units
1 of 7
Section 15011, “Mechanical General Requirements,” applies to this section with the
additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
a. Packaged Central station air handling units.

b. Fan Coils
c. Chilled Water Ceiling Cassette Units
a. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of

components who issues complete catalog data on total product offering.
b. Constant/Variable Air Volume Air Handling Units: Certify air volume, static pressure,
fan speed, brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 430.
Manufacturer shall be responsible for expenses associated with testing of units after
fabrication to verify capacities of fan(s).
c. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance
with ARI 410-87.
d. Chilled Water Ceiling Cassette Units: Certify capacities, pressure drops and
selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410-87.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Central station Air Handler, Fan Coil Units.
a. Submit as-built drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15011.
b. As-built drawings shall show total unit configuration in direction of airflow, unit
dimensions, and field duct connection details.
c. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, coil performance, motor electrical
characteristics, and finishes of materials, filter media, filter sizes, and filter quantities.
d. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15011.
e. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. Fan curves shall
indicate air volume, static pressure, fan speed and brake horsepower.
f. Submit sound power levels by octave band for air handling units at scheduled
design conditions. Provide sound power levels for "discharge" and "inlet plus
cabinet" sound paths in accordance with AMCA 300 (or ASHRAE 68) and AMCA
301.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
a. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15011.
b. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive

replacement, belt tension adjustments, and wiring diagrams.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
2 of 7
a. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15011. Units shall ship fully
assembled on factory-installed base rails up to practical shipping and rigging
limitations. Units not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on
each section to indicate location and orientation in direction of airflow. Each section
shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement of
section.
b. Units shall be cleaned and wrapped at the factory prior to shipment. Cleaning shall
consist of wiping the entire unit down with lint-free wipes using a solution of 80% de-
ionized water and 20% isopropyl alcohol. After wipe down, the units shall be
double-wrapped in polyethylene to minimize the potential for contamination while in
transit or storage.
c. Deliver units to site with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assembled and
mounted in units. Mount motors as specified in Article 2.3 Paragraph D and Article
2.4 Paragraph A.
d. Store and protect products under provision of Section 15011.
e. Store wrapped units in clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction
traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters
are in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.
1.9 EXTRA STOCK
Provide two sets of disposable filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications.
Manufacturer is responsible for expenses that occur due to exceptions made.
2.2 Central-Station Air Handlers
a. Fabricate draw-through type air-handling units with fan sections, coil sections, filter
sections, and mixing box.
b. Factory fabricates air-handling units of sizes, capacities, and configurations as

scheduled on drawings.
c. Provide factory-installed base rails to support all sections of units. Construct base
rails of minimum 10-gauge steel channels or I-beams. Base rail shall be chemically
cleaned, coated with rust-inhibiting primer, and finished with epoxy paint.
2.2.1 Casing
a. Construct casings of minimum 16-gauge G90-u galvanized steel structural frames

and minimum 50 mm (2-inches) thick double wall panels. Construct double wall
panels of minimum 18-gauge epoxy-painted steel exterior panels and minimum 20-
gauge steel interior panels or single wall panel of minimum 18 gauge epoxy-painted
steel exterior panel as specified in the Equipment Schedule. In order to properly
clean the interior of the air handler of particulate other debris, the casings shall be
3 of 7
constructed such that structural frames are free standing and wall panels are non-
load bearing. Contractor shall be responsible to provide connection flanges and all
other framework that is needed on unit to ensure that removal of wall panels shall
not affect structural integrity of unit.
b. Construct casing sections located upstream of supply fan for operation at 4 inches
water gage negative static pressure and casing sections located downstream of
supply fan for operation at 6 inches water gage positive static pressure. Seal joints
between casing sections with closed-cell foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal
and acoustical break. All joints shall be caulked on both the interior and exterior.
c. Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thoroughly clean panels
and to access internal parts. Secure panels to structural frames with stainless steel
screws. Seal joints between exterior panels and structural frames with closed-cell
foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break. All joints shall be
caulked on both the interior and exterior.
d. Casings shall have removable access panels or doors as scheduled on drawings.

Construct access doors on minimum 18-gauge, epoxy-painted steel exterior panels
and minimum 22-gauge epoxy-painted steel interior panels. Provide automotive
style neoprene gasketing around full perimeter of access doors to prevent air
leakage. Provide "ventlock" style non-corrosive alloy latches operable from the
inside or outside of unit. If access doors do not open against unit operating
pressure, provide safety latches that allow access doors to partially open after first
handle movement and fully open after second handle movement. Insulate access
doors with 1-inch thick 1-½ pound per cubic foot density matt-faced fiberglass
insulation.
e. Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thoroughly clean panels
and to access internal parts. Secure panels to structural frames with stainless steel
screws. Seal joints between exterior panels and structural frames with closed-cell
foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break. All joints shall be
caulked on both the interior and exterior.
f. Casing shall have removable access panels or doors as scheduled on drawings.

Construct access doors on minimum 18-gauge, epoxy painted steel exterior and
minimum 22-gauge epoxy painted steel interior panels. Provide automotive type
neoprene gasketing around full perimeter of access doors to prevent air leakage.
Provide "ventlock" style non-corrosive alloy latches operable from the inside or
outside of unit. If access doors do not open against unit operating pressure, provide
safety latches that allow access doors to partially open after first handle movement
and fully open after second handle movement. Insulate access doors with 2-inch
thick, 1-½ pound per cubic foot density matt-faced fiberglass insulation.
g. Insulate casing sections with 1-inch thick, 1-½ pound per cubic foot density matt-
faced fiberglass insulation. Provide double wall casing construction and encase
insulation between exterior and interior casing panels such that no insulation is
exposed to airstreams. Foil facing on insulation is not acceptable as alternate to
double wall construction. Insulate all structural channels connected to casing panels
and cover openings in structural channels with epoxy painted steel. Insulation shall
comply with NFPA 90A. Insulation for single wall casing shall be the same as in
double wall casing however exposed face of insulation shall be applied with
neoprene coating suitable for this application.
h. Insulate fan sections and discharge plenums with 1-inch thick, 1-½ pound per cubic
foot density matt-faced fiberglass insulation. Provide double wall casing construction
and encase insulation between exterior and interior casing panels such that no
insulation is exposed to air stream. Foil facing on insulation is not acceptable as
alternate to double wall construction. Insulate all structural channels connected to
4 of 7
casing panels and cover openings in structural channels with epoxy painted steel.
Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A.
i. Provide sealed double wall drain pass constructed of minimum 18-gauge epoxy
painted exterior pans and minimum 18-gauge 304 stainless steel interior panels.
Encase manufacturer's standard insulation between exterior and interior panels.
Drain pans shall be sloped in 2 planes; cross break interior pans and pitch toward
drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage. Units with cooling coils
shall have drains pans under complete cooling coil section. All drain pan
connections will be to the side of the unit.
2.2.2 Fans
a. Provide supply fan section(s) with BI or AF double width, double inlet centrifugal fan
designed and suitable for class of service indicated in the unit schedule. Fan shaft
to be properly sized and protectively coated with a thin coat of epoxy paint applied
after shaft installation. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan
shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM.
Fans shall be statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM
to meet design specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping.
b. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated pillow-block ball bearings selected for L-10;
200,000-hour minimum life per ANSI/AFBMA 9. Extend grease lubrication fittings to
drive side of unit with stainless steel tubes and Zerk fittings rigidly attached to
casing.
c. Mount fans on minimum 16-gage epoxy painted steel isolation bases. Internally
mount motors on same isolation bases and internally isolate fans with 2-inch housed
spring seismic isolators. Install flexible ducts of heavy glass fabric double-coated
between fan and casings to ensure proper isolation and prevent vibration and noise
from being transmitted through the unit. Flexible ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A.
d. Fan sections shall have full height, double wall, hinged, removable access doors on
both sides for inspection and maintenance of internal components. Construct doors
in accordance with Article 2.2 Paragraph D. To facilitate inspection of internal
components, provide 8- by 10-inch sealed glass and wire view windows on access
doors and provide marine lights inside fan sections. Construct marine lights of
sealed glass fixtures with wire guards to keep electrical sockets dry and protect
fixtures from damage.
e. Statically and dynamically balance fan section assemblies. Fan section assemblies
include fan wheels, shafts, bearings, drives, belts, isolation bases and isolators.
Allow isolators to free float when performing fan balance. Measure vibration at each
fan shaft bearing in horizontal, vertical and axial directions.
2.2.3 Motor and Drives
a. Factory installs all motors on slide base to permit adjustment to belt tension.
b. Fan motors shall be heavy duty, high efficiency TEFC, operable at 460 volts, 60 Hz,
3-phase.
c. V-belt drive shall be constant pitch rated at 1.2 times the motor nameplate.
5 of 7
2.2.4 Coils
a. Coils shall be manufactured by the same company as the supplier of the air
handling unit. Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit
casings.
b. Construct coils of configuration plate fins and seamless tubes. Fins shall have collar
drawn, belled and firmly bonded to tubes by means of mechanical expansion of
tubes. Do not use soldering or tinning in bonding process.
c. Construct coil casings of minimum 16-gauge stainless steel with formed end
supports and top and bottom channels. If two or more coils are stacked in unit,
install intermediate drain channels between coils to drain condensate to main drain
pans without flooding lower coils or passing condensate through air stream.
2.2.5 Filters
a. Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit
casings. Filter sections shall have filter guides and full height, double wall, hinged,
removable access doors for filter removal. Construct doors in accordance with
Article 2.2 Paragraph D. Filter sections shall flange to other unit components.
Provide filter block-offs as required to prevent air bypass around filters.
b. Provide 4-inch flat filter sections with maximum face velocity of 550 feet per minute
with disposable filters. Filters shall be coated with an anti-microbial coating to
prevent microbes from growing in the filters. Filters shall be removable from both
side(s) of filter sections.
c. Provide high-efficiency filter sections as indicated on plans with maximum face

velocity of 550 feet per minute with cartridge filters and disposable panel pre-filters.
High efficiency filters shall be efficient with rated in accordance with ASHRAE 52
and UL Class 1 or Class 2. Filters shall be coated with an anti-microbial coating to
prevent microbes from growing in the filters. Filters shall be removable from both
sides of filter sections.
2.2.6 Mixing Box
Include equally sized openings, sized to handle full air capacity. Provide manual dampers
as indicated.
2.3 CHILLED WATER CEILING CASSETTE UNIT
Cassette unit shall be design for air-foil blade centrifugal fan, high efficiency, quiet, and four
way air distribution pattern. Return air enters the cassette unit through a large grille, cleaned
by an easily removable and washable filter. The unit shall be equipped with an automatic
condensate drain pump.
2.4 DUCTWORK
SECTION 15895, “Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories”
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
Section 15971, “Space Temperature Control Systems.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
6 of 7
Install air distribution equipment as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Provide clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service. Electrical
work shall conform to NFPA 70 and Division 16, “Electrical”. Provide overload protection in
the operating disconnect switches and magnetic starters.
3.2 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTS
Schedule and administer the specified tests. Provide personnel, instruments, and
equipment for such tests. Correct defects and repeat the respective inspection and tests.
Give the Engineer ample notice of the dates and times scheduled for tests and trial
operations. Conduct inspection and testing in the presence of the Engineer and Owner’s
representative.
3.2.1 Field Inspection
Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment installation for conformance with drawings and
specifications.
3.2.2 Field Tests
3.2.2.1 Preliminary Tests
For each item of air handling and distribution equipment and its components, perform an
operational test for a minimum period of 8 hours.
3.2.2.2 Testing and Balancing
After preliminary tests, test, adjust, and balance the air handling and distribution equipment
in accordance with Section 15895, “Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories” 15996, “Testing
and Balancing Air and Water Systems”.
Air handling units and chilled water type ceiling cassette fan coil units shall be counted by
the actual sets installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
contract unit price, respectively for each of the Pay Items listed below and shown in the Bill
of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Section.
******
7 of 7
Section VI- Technical Specifications Industrial Ventilation and Exhaust Systems
(Fans & Blowers)
SECTION 15871- VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS (FANS & BLOWERS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
The latest editions of the publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referenced to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.1.1 US Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

Standards
1.1.2 Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Publications:
99 Standards Handbook
210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
1.1.3 American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Manual Industrial

Ventilation
A Manual of Recommended Practice
Z49.1-83 Safety in Welding and Cutting
1.1.5 American Welding Society (AWS) Publications
D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Steel
D1.3-81 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel
1.1.6 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications
ICS 2 – 1983 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assembles

(Rev 1-3)
ICS 6-1983 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and System
MG 1-78 Motors and Generators

R 1981
Rev. 1-8
91.83 Installation of Blower and Exhaust System for dust, stock, and vapor removal
or conveying
1.1.8 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Publications
1975-1 Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction
1977 (Rev. A) High Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
1980-3 Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards
1977-2 Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
1 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
1.1.9 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Specifications
SP 5-85 White Metal Blast Cleaning
PA 2-82 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with

Magnetic Gages
555-79 Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers Building

Materials Directory
705-79 Power Roof Ventilator
Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements" applies to this section with the
modifications specified herein.
1.2.1 Submittals
1.2.2 Shop Drawing
a. Fan installation drawings

b. Duct systems
c. Support and anchor location, field-fabricated roof curbs, load imposed and structural
design calculations.
1.2.3 Manufacturer's Data and Shop Drawings
Submit manufacturer’s brochures and layout drawings for approval before delivery of materials
and equipment. They shall contain enough detailed information to determine that the
equipment conforms with the requirements of the Specification:
a. Fans including fan curves or rating tables, derating factors, and temperature ratings
b. Sleeve bearing data
c. Supports and hangers
d. Vibration isolators
1.2.4 Procedures
a. Welding
b. Testing agenda
c. Testing procedures
a. Fan data, including sound power level data

b. System test reports
1.2.6 Performance Curves for Fans
Submit certified performance curves including maximum and minimum settings. Indicate power,
mechanical efficiency, static pressure, and total pressure plotted against flow rate in m³/hr, cmh
(ft³/min., cfm).
2 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
Furnish three complete sets of bound operating and maintenance instructions specifically for
this installation. Operating portion shall be bound separately from Maintenance portion. Explain
in detail any component or method peculiar to a particular system. Furnish one complete
manual prior to the time that the equipment tests are performed. Provide a table of contents.
Instruction sheets shall be legible and easily understood, with large sheets of drawings folded
in. The manual shall be complete for all equipment, accessories, and appurtenances stipulated.
Include as a minimum the following:
a. System layouts showing machinery and controls

b. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation of each component
c. Control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown

d. Installation instructions
e. Safety precautions, trouble-shooting diagrams, and illustrations
f. Test procedures
g. Performance data
h. Parts lists, with manufacturers’ names and catalog numbers
i. Preventive maintenance schedules
j. Service organizations with names, addresses, and telephone numbers
1.2.8 Posted Operating Instructions
Shall be provided at the time of final inspection and acceptance
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1 Qualification of Welders
The quality of welding and welding procedures shall be determined by testing the welders’
ability to make sound welds under standard working conditions, with the equipment to be used
on the project, and in conformance with AWS D1.1. Submit certified copies of the qualifications
of the welders employed on the contract. The Project Engineer shall be notified 24 hours in
advance as to the time and place the tests will be conducted. Whenever practical, the tests
shall be performed at the work site. The Project Engineer shall be furnished with a listing of the
names and symbols to be used to identify the work performed by the welder or welding operator
who, after completing a welded joint, shall identify it as his work by applying his assigned
symbol for a permanent record. Welders who make acceptable procedure qualification test
welds will be considered performance-qualified for the welding procedure used. Welders
making defective welds during the qualification tests and welders responsible for making
defective welds after passing the test shall be given a re-qualification test. Reassign a welder
who fails a re-qualification test.
1.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.4.1 Guards and Screens
Provide metal personnel safety guards for fans mounted within 2.1 m (7 ft) of occupied space
and/or otherwise normally accessible unducted fan inlets and discharges and moving power
transmission components in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.219. Construct guards and
screens to provide, as applicable: required strength and clearance with minimal reduction in
free area at fan inlets and discharges; cooling; access panels and tachometer readings; ease of
sectional disassembly for maintenance and inspection functions where guard total weight
exceeds 23 kg (50 lb.); weather protection where components are weather-exposed. Installed
guards and screens shall not negate noise control and vibration isolation provisions.
3 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
Fan RPM should not exceed that recommended in performance tables.
Insulate surfaces with service temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) and accessible to
personnel from normal operating or maintenance location for burn protection as part of work
under Section 15250, "Insulation of Mechanical Systems".
1.4.2 Welding
Conform to ANSI Z49.1 for safety in welding and cutting.
Part 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FANS
Statically and dynamically balanced; overall run-out shall not be greater than 1.6 mm (0.0625
in.). Fan types, arrangements, air-moving capacities and pressure ratings as indicated on the
equipment schedule. Fans shall be AMCA certified. Fan performances indicated on the
drawings shall be minimums.
Fan bearing life shall be minimum 200,000 hours (L50) at operating conditions. Fans shall be
equipped with gravity back-draft dampers or electric motorized dampers where indicated;
multidirectional vibration isolators to relieve vibration transmission from the unit; corrosion-
resistant screens to exclude birds, debris, or insects. V-belt drives shall be factory preset to the
specified rpm. Pulleys shall be sized for at least 150% of driven horsepower.
Fans shall have thermal overload protection in the operating disconnect switches within the
building.
2.1.1 Centrifugal In-line Fans
AMCA “B” construction: The fan shall have a non-ferrous impeller and non-ferrous ring about
the opening through which the shaft passes. Ferrous hubs, shafts, and hardware are allowed
provided construction is such that a shift in impeller or shaft will not permit two ferrous parts of
the fan to rub or strike. Direct - or belt-driven; non-overloading, backward-curved blower wheels;
deep spun venturi; galvanized- or painted steel frame and casing. Electric motor shall be
isolated from air stream. Shall have removable, gasketed, panels for access to interior. Provide
hanger-type isolators with brackets for overhead installation on structural members; flexible
neoprene shear pads or rubber isolators with support channels for floor installation.
2.1.2 Centrifugal Roof Exhauster
Heavy gauge aluminum hoods die-formed for uniformity, with a rolled bead for improved
strength, can be easily removed for access to motor compartment. Fan and motor.
Combinations are individually tested to insure the balance of motor capacity to fan’s
requirements, insuring proper motor loading for longer life. Backward curved non-overloading
aluminum airfoil impeller is statically and dynamically balanced for smooth, vibration free
performance. The following accessories shall be provided by the fan manufacturer; bird screen
made of 13 mm x 13 mm hardware cloth; un-fused safety disconnect switches; Internal wiring
between motor and disconnect; gravity back draft dampers and factory fabricated roof curb.
2.1.3 Supply Fans
Centrifugal in-line supply fan, backward inclined, non-overloading fan complete with filter and
TEFC motor. Motor can be serviced without disturbing the inlet/discharge duct connection.
Access doors shall be provided to allow servicing of wheel, bearings, shaft and drive
components.
4 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
2.2 DUCT WORKS
Section 15895, "Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories."
2.2.1 Motors and Motor Starters
Refer to electrical drawings.
2.2.2 Wall-Mounted Exhaust Fans
Sidewall direct driven propeller fan with backdraft damper, ODP motor and rain hood. Provide
connection of permanent wiring. Refer to equipment schedule for the airflow capacity and
electrical data.
Part 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Installation Requirements
Installation shall conform to NFPA 91, and SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction
Standards, and SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. Provide
mounting and supports for equipment, ductwork, and accessories, including structural supports,
hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, blast gates, and
dampers. Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions. Positive
pressure duct inside buildings shall be constructed airtight.
Steps shall be taken to insure that the impeller, bearings, and shaft are adequately attached
and/or restrained to prevent a lateral or axial shift in these components.
3.1.2 Electrical Ground Continuity
Where electrical ground continuity is required, provide brazed connection insulated,

multi-strand, copper wire jumpers across points of discontinuity. Connection to ground and
continuity testing shall be provided as part of the work of Division 16.
3.1.3 Special Installation Requirements for Productivity Coated Steel Ductwork for Corrosive Fume
and Vapor Exhaust
Slope horizontal ducts flow or in the direction of air flow or in the direction opposite to airflow.
Where necessary, slope duct to common drainage point. Provide drains at low points, at
internal duct restrictions, as base of risers and where indicated.
3.1.4 Building Penetrations
3.1.4.1 General Penetration Requirements
Provide properly sized, fabricated, located, and trade coordinated sleeves and prepared
openings, for duct mains, branches, and other item penetrations, during the construction of the
surface to be penetrated. Provide sleeves for round duct and items 381 mm (15 inches) and
smaller and prepared openings for round duct larger than 381 mm (15 inches) and square or
rectangular duct. Sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated, shall be 20-gauge,
0.0396-inch (one-mm) thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Sleeves penetrating load-bearing
surfaces shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe. Provide roof penetrations as shown in
SMACNA Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction.
3.1.4.2 Framed Opening
Provide framed openings in accordance with approved shop drawings. Refer to paragraph
entitled "Fire Dampers," in this section, for related work.
5 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
3.1.4.3 Clearances
Provide a minimum 25.4 mm (one inch) clearance between penetrating and penetrated
surfaces. Fill clearance space with bulk fibrous glass or mineral wool and seal and close.
3.1.4.4 Tightness
Penetration shall be weather-tight, fireproof where fire rated surfaces are penetrated, vapor-tight
to prevent vapor transmission to conditioned spaces, sound-tight to prevent vapor transmission
normally occupied or finished spaces, flammable substances or gases could migrated.
3.1.4.5 Sealants
Sealant shall be elastomeric type. Apply to oil free surfaces to a minimum 10 mm (3/8 inch)
depth.
3.1.4.6 Closure Collars
Provide a minimum 102 mm (4 inches) wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and
items on each side of penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install collar
tight against the surface and fit snugly around penetrating item without contact. Sharp edges
shall be ground smooth to prevent damage to penetrating surface. Collars for round ducts 381
mm (15 inches) in diameter or less shall be fabricated from 20-gauge, (0.0396-inch) one-mm
nominal thickness, mill galvanized steel. Use a minimum of 4 fasteners to attach collars where
the opening is 305 mm (12 inches) in diameter or less, a minimum of 8 fasteners where the
opening is 508 mm (20 inches) in diameter or less. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular
ducts with a maximum size of 381 mm (25 inches) or less from 20-gauge, (0.0396-inch)
one-mm nominal thickness, and mill-galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for round, square, and
rectangular ducts with minimum dimension over 381 mm (15 inches) from 28-gauge, (0.0516
inch) 1.3 mm in nominal thickness, mill galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a
maximum of 152 mm (6 inches) on center.
3.1.5 Installation of Flexible Connectors
Flexibly connect duct and vibration isolated fans and specified components. When fans are
started, stopped, or operating, flexible connector surfaces shall be curvilinear, free of stress
induced by misalignment or fan reaction forces, and shall not transmit vibration. Leakage shall
not be perceptible to the hand when place within 152 mm (6 inches) of the flexible connector
surface or joint. Provide a minimum of 152 mm (6 inches) and a maximum of (2 feet) 0.6 m
active length with a minimum of 25 mm (one inch) of slack, secured at each end by folding in to
24-gauge sheet metal or by metal collar framed.
3.1.6 Installation of Supports
3.1.6.1 Selection
Selection of duct and equipment support system shall take into account the best practice
recommendations and requirements of SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and
NFPA 91; location and precedence of work under other sections; interferences of various piping
and electrical work; facility equipment; building configuration; structural and safety factor
requirements; vibration and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service conditions.
Indicated support sizes, configurations, and spacing are the minimal type of supporting
component required for normal loads. Where installed loads are excessive for the normal
support spacing, provide heavier duty components or reduce the element spacing. After system
start-up, replace or correct support elements, which vibrate and cause noise or possible fatigue
failure. Exercise special care to prevent cascading failure.
6 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
3.1.6.2 General Requirements for Supports
Securely attach supporting elements to building structural steel or structural slabs. Where
supports are required between building structural members provide supplementary structural
steel as specified for work under this section. On submittals, show location of supports and
anchors and loads imposed on each point of support or anchor. Do not hang equipment from
piping other equipment. Attach supports only to structural framing member and concrete slab.
Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for
preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required
between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Where
C-clamps are used, provide retainer clips. A maximum span of 3 m (10 ft) shall exist between
any two points, with lesser spans as specified or as required by duct assemblies, interferences,
and loads imposed or permitted. Provide a minimum one set of two vertical support elements
for each point of support and each length of duct, except as otherwise specified. Install
supports on both sides of all duct turns, branch fittings, and transitions. Cross-brace hangers
sufficiently to eliminate sway. Perforated straphangers are prohibited. Where ductwork system
contains heavy equipment, hang such equipment independently of the ductwork. Duct support
shall be vibration isolated from structure at point indicated. Provide vibration isolators in
indicated discharge ducting system for a minimum distance of 50 m (164 feet) beyond the fan.
Coordinate deflection of equipment mountings and conform to Section 15200, "Noise, Vibration,
and Control". The location of supporting elements shall be limited by the allowable load on the
purlin which shall be limited so that no greater than the moment produced by one Kip load at
mid-span of purlin. When the hanger load exceeds these limits, provide reinforcing of purlins or
additional support beams. When an additional beam is used, the beam shall bear on the top
chord of the roof trusses and bearing shall be over gusset plats of top chord. Stabilize beam by
connection to roof purlin along bottom flange.
3.1.6.3 Methods of Attachment
Attachment to building structural steel shall be by bolting or by welding, in accordance with

AWA D1.1. Masonry anchors selected for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous
materials only. Install masonry anchors in rotary, non-percussion, and electric drilled holes.
Self-drilling anchors may be used provided masonry drilling is performed with electric hammers
selected and applied in such a manner as to prevent concrete spalling or cracking. Pneumatic
tools are prohibited.
3.1.7 Welding
Welding shall be done in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 and AWS
D1.3.
3.1.8 Test Ports
Provide test access ports at points required for work under paragraph 3.2, "Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing", in this section. Locate test ports in straight duct as far as practical downstream
of fans, change of direction fittings, takeoffs, interior to duct accessories, and like turbulent flow
area.
3.1.9 Protective Coating Work
3.1.9.1 General Requirements for Protective Coating Work
Provide protective coating on exterior surfaces of ducts and surfaces of equipment with system
as specified hereafter. Prime coat exterior surfaces of ducts and equipment with inorganic zinc
coating as part of work under this section. Brush primer or protective coating where no primer is
specified, onto corners and into crevices and welds, working the material into irregular surfaces
for a holiday free finish.
7 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
3.1.9.2 Inorganic Zinc Coating System
3.1.9.2.1 General Requirements, Inorganic Zinc Coating System
The following shall govern for a protective coating system primer based on inorganic zinc
coating intended for shop application to specified black carbon steel surfaces with subsequent
field finishing with compatible tie coat and modified acrylic top coat.
3.1.9.2.3 Surface Preparation
SSPC SP 5
3.1.9.2.4 Application
Apply one coat at 2 to 3 mils (51 to 76 microns) dry film thickness by airless or conventional
spray equipment. Use only those thinners and cleaners in amount recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.1.9.2.4 Repair
Field repair damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.9.3 Field Inspection of Protective Coating Work
Visually inspect coated surfaces from a maximum distance of (5 feet) 1.5 m with special
attention given to corners and crevices. Check coating thickness in accordance with SSPC PA
2. Perform inspection immediately prior to erection of ductwork and equipment and in the
presence of the Contracting Engineer. Repair coating as required. Apply additional coating if
thickness is not sufficient.
3.1.10 Factory and Field Painting and Finishing
3.1.10.1 Factory Work
Factory finish interior ferrous metal and other specified metallic equipment and component
surfaces with manufacturer's standard surface preparation, primer, and finish coating. Factory
finish exterior to building space ferrous metal surfaces and other exterior to building and interior
to building metallic or nonmetallic surfaces with specified protective coating system in
accordance with the paragraph entitled "Protective Coating Material", in this section and
otherwise with manufacturer's standard surface preparation, primer and finish which meet the
requirements of paragraph entitled "Corrosion Prevention."
3.1.10.2 Field Work
Touch-up or if necessary, repaint factory applied finishes which are marred, damaged, or
degraded during shipping, storage, handling, or installation to match the original finish. Field or
shop fabricated ferrous metals required for installation specified under this section shall be
cleaned and primed. Painting of surfaces not otherwise specified and finish painting of items
primed at the factory or elsewhere, are specified as part of the work.
3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Testing, adjusting and balancing shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15996.
3.3 SYSTEM OPERATION DEMONSTRATION
After systems and equipment testing, adjusting, and balancing has been completed and
accepted, demonstrate the complete and correct functioning of systems equipment and controls
by operation through normal ranges and sequences, and by simulation of abnormal conditions,
including the manual tripping of fire dampers. Manually and automatically cause every device
8 of 9
(Fans & Blowers)
to function as intended. Readjust, as necessary, any settings and after sufficient operating time,
but not less than 6 hours, verify ability of equipment and controls to establish and maintain
stable and accurate operation and required system performance. Note any abnormal
deviations, such as excessive vibration, noise, and head, binding damper mechanisms, and
incorrect fan rotation. Make any necessary repairs, replacements or adjustments.
Exhaust fans, exhaust air duct and exhaust pipe support shall be either counted or measured
in linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
******
9 of 9
Section VI- Technical Specifications Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories
SECTION 15895 - DUCTWORK AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
Part 1 - GENERAL
The latest edition of publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.1.1 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA) Publications
HVACDCS HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible
HVACTAB HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
HVACALTM HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
1.1.2 Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Publications
ADC 1062R4 Air Diffusing Equipment Certification, Rating, and Test Material
ADC-63 Measurement of Room-to-Room Sound Transmission through

Plenum Air Systems
1.1.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Publication
ASTM A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
ASTM A 167 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A 527 / A 527M Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-
Dip Process, Lock- Forming Quality
ASTM B 117 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
ASTM C 553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type)
ASTM D 1654 Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive

Environments
ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM E 437 Specification for Industrial Wire Cloth and Screens (Square Opening
Series)
1.1.4 Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Publication
AMCA 500 Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters
1.1.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication
NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements," applies to this section with the additions
and modifications specified herein.
1 of 10
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Shop Drawings
Submit shop-drawing showing the general arrangement of equipment, duct connections,

hangers and others. Indicate also the equipment/duct sizes including control distances.
a. Dampers
b. Duct Connectors
c. Flexible Ducts and Connectors
d. Insulation and Vapor Barrier
e. Louvers
f. Air Filters
g. Eliminators
h. Drip Pans
i. Insect Screens
j. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
k. Sheet Metals
l. Test Holes
m. Acoustic Duct Liner
n. Variable Air Volume Boxes
1.3.3 Certificates of Conformance
a. Fire Dampers and Automatic Dampers
a. Automatic Dampers. Submit certification of damper leakage testing and conformance

with AMCA 500 and specified maximum leakage or pressure drop requirements.
b. Corrosion Protection
1.3.5 Field Test Reports
1.3.6 SMACNA Duct Construction Manuals
The SMACNA recommendations shall be considered as mandatory requirements. Substitute

the word "shall" for the word "should" in these manuals. No negative pressure construction for
100-mm (4-inch), 150-mm (6-inch), or 250-mm (10-inch) water gauge is provided herein.
1.3.7 Pressure -Velocity Qualification
Conforms to SMACNA HVACDCS Section I, “Basic Duct Construction”.
1.4 TESTING FOR CORROSION PROTECTION
Comply with ASTM A 123 or protect the equipment with a corrosion-inhibiting coating or paint
system that has proved capable of satisfactory withstanding corrosion in accordance with ASTM
B 117. Test shall be 125 hours for equipment installed indoors and 500 hours for equipment
2 of 10
installed outdoors or subjected to marine atmosphere. Each specimen shall have a standard
scratch as defined in ASTM D 1654.
1.4.1 Corrosion Criteria
Upon completion of exposure, coating or paint shall show no indication of 4deterioration or loss
of adhesion, nor shall there be indication of rust or corrosion extending further than 3 mm (1/8
in.) on either side of original scratch.
1.4.2 Thickness of Coating
Thickness of coating or paint system on the actual equipment shall be identical to that on the
test specimens with respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry film thickness.
1.5 PRESSURE VELOCITY CLASSIFICATION
Conforms to SMACNA HVACDCS, Section I, “Basic Duct Construction”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MATERIALS
2.1.1 Galvanized Steel Sheets (For all ordinary air-conditioning and ventilation ducts)
Thickness shall correspond with the G90 coating designation within ASTM A525; lock-forming
grade shall conform to ASTM A527.
a. Rigid Metal Ducts : General configuration; materials; application limits; and construction,
including reinforcements, joints, and seams shall be guided by SMACNA HVACDCS
Section I “Basic Duct Construction”.
b. Duct Fittings : SMACNA HVACDCS Section II, “Fittings and Other Constructions” shall
guide Construction.
c. Duct Hangers and Supports : SMACNA HVACDCS Section IV, “Hangers and Supports”
shall guide Configuration.
d. Bird Screens : Galvanized steel; nominal 2 x 2 mesh with 1.6-mm (0.063-in.) wire
diameter.
e. Insect Screens : Provide removable nominal 8 x 8 mesh with 0.028 in. wire dia. insect
screens of grooved type, with vinyl or neoprene spline insert for securing screen cloth.
f. Air Filters: Disposable-element or washable type as indicated on equipment schedule.

Permanent holding frames shall be aluminum or galvanized steel. Filter-media
identification and airflow direction shall be indicated on frame.
2.1.2 Replaceable Cartridge
UL 95%, Class 2, UL classified and factory assembled, use filter media of Ultra-fine glass fiber
having 95% average dust spot efficiencies, as indicated on plans, with final resistance of 249 Pa
(1-inch W.G.) maximum velocity of 3.18 m/sec (625 FPM) and capacity indicated.
2.1.3 Ceiling Diffusers
Steel or aluminum construction. Four-way diffusion pattern, Surface mounted. Mitered flat face
borders with gaskets to overlap ceiling opening and minimize smudging on ceiling surface.
Removable directional cores to provide access to accessories like opposed blade damper and
connecting duct. Factory chemical treatment of bare metal surfaces prior to application of
primer and baked enamel finish. Color to be selected and approved by Architect.
3 of 10
2.1.4 Air Grilles
Extruded aluminum construction. Mitered flat face borders to overlap ceiling or sidewall
opening. Gaskets on supply air grille borders shall minimize smudging on ceiling or wall
surfaces. Single or double set of individually adjustable streamline section blades. Retainer to
firmly hold deflection setting. Factory chemical treatment of bare metal surfaces prior to
application of primer and powder coated finish. Color to be selected and approved by Architect.
2.1.5 Opposed-Blade Dampers
For mounting on the neck of diffusers and grilles. Extruded aluminum construction. Gang-
operated blades mounted in a rigid frame. Opposed-acting blades shall be key- or screwdriver-
operated from the face of diffuser or grille. Plain mill finished.
2.1.6 Air Registers
Grilles with integral opposed-blade volume dampers. Factory assembled using rivets or
retaining clips. Refer to individual description of Grilles and Opposed-Blade Volume Dampers.
2.1.7 Variable Air Volume
VAV terminal units shall be the type, size, and capacity shown and shall be mounted in the
ceiling and shall be suitable for single or dual duct system applications. Actuators and
controls shall be as specified in paragraph CONTROLS. Unit enclosures shall be
constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 0.85 mm (22 gauge 22 gauge or aluminum
sheet not lighter than 1.3 mm (18 gauge).18 gauge. Single or multiple discharge outlets
shall be provided as required. Units with flow limiters are not acceptable. Unit air volume
shall be factory preset and readily field adjustable without special tools. Reheat coils shall
be provided as indicated. A flow chart shall be attached to each unit. Acoustic performance
of the terminal units shall be based upon units tested according to ARI 880. Sound power
level shall be as indicated.. Acoustical lining shall be according to NFPA 90A.
2.2 DUCT SEALANTS
Mastic Type. Shall have excellent adhesion and elasticity for resistance to weathering, cracking,
chipping, peeling, or shrinking.
Gaskets. Elastomeric type or open- or closed-cell rubber.
2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS
Balancing, factory-fabricated type. Galvanized-steel frame and blades zinc-plated shafts; and
bronze bushings. Opposed-acting, die-formed interlocking blades. Blades shall operate
simultaneously with minimum torque. Provide dampers with an extended shaft, quadrant
operator, lever, locking setscrew, and bushing brought through the side of ducts. When installed
on ducts to be thermally insulated, equip each damper-operator with stand-off mounting
brackets, bases, or adapters to provide clearance between the duct and operator not less than
the thickness of insulation. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or
standard accessory of damper manufacturer. Where quadrant operators are used, they shall
be zinc plated with no exposed sharp edges. Quadrant shall have markings to indicate fully
open or fully closed position of damper blades.
2.3.1 Fire Dampers
UL 555
4 of 10
2.3.2 Back draft Dampers (Gravity Dampers or Shutters)
Factory-fabricated, with statically balanced blades that open automatically when the fan starts
and close by gravity when the fan stops. Provide the edges of blades with felt or rubber strips
to prevent rattling.
2.3.3 Motorized Combination Fire & Smoke Damper - unit shall be made of galvanized steel with
multiple blade damper, fire rated at 1 1/2 hour, UL standard 555, damper and actuator shall
be factory assembled and tested to assure operation.
2.4 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) BOX
Unit casing shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal, with round
inlet collars of the proper diameter and slip and drive connection on discharge opening. Single
duct terminal units shall be factory assembled with a primary air damper assembly contained
in a single unit housing. Interior surface of the unit casing shall be thermally and acoustically
lined with a 25mm (1 inch) thick fibrous glass blanket with a black top layer and a green core.
Complies with NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, UL 181, and ASTM C 1071. Thermal conductance
shall be 0.26 Btu/hr-ft2-°F. The unit shall be also equipped with differential pressure sensor
and actuator.
2.5 DUCTS OF PRESSURE CLASS 150 MM (6 INCH) OR LESS WATER GAUGE
Construction, metal gauge, hangers and supports, and reinforcements shall conform to
SMACNA HVACDCS. Ductwork shall be airtight and shall not vibrate or pulsate when system
is in operation. Air leakage shall be less than 5 percent of the system capacity. Construct
ductwork of galvanized steel.
2.5.1 Laps
Make laps at joints in the direction of airflow. Space button-punch or bolt-connection in standing
seams at fixed centers not greater than 150 mm. Longitudinal locks or seams, known as
"Button Punch Snap-Lock" may be used in lieu of Pittsburgh Lock.
2.6 DUCT SLEEVES AND PREPARED OPENINGS
2.6.1 General Penetration Requirements
Provide sleeves or prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other item penetrations
during the construction of the surface to be penetrated. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the proper size and location of sleeves and prepared openings.
a. Duct Sleeves
Provide sleeves for round ducts and items 375 mm (15 in.) diameter and smaller.
Sleeves, unless otherwise specified, shall be 20-ga. galvanized steel. Install
structural steel sleeves where load-bearing surfaces are penetrated. Allow 25-mm
(1-in.) clearance between duct and sleeve or, for insulated ducts, between insulation
and sleeve, except at diffusers, grilles, and registers.
b. Prepared Openings
Provide prepared openings for rectangular ducts, round ducts, items larger than 375
mm (15 in.). Allow a 25-mm (1-in.) clearance between duct and edge of opening or,
for insulated ducts, between insulation and edge of opening, except at diffusers,
grilles, and registers.
5 of 10
c. Closure Collars
Provide a collar, a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) wide, on each side of walls or floors
where sleeves or prepared openings are installed. Fit collars snugly around ducts and
insulation. Grind smooth edges of collar to preclude tearing or puncturing insulation
covering or vapor barrier. Use nails with maximum 150 mm (6 in.) centers on collars.
2.7 DEFLECTORS
Factory-fabricated and factory-or-field-assembled units consisting of curved turning vanes for

uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence and pressure loss.
Provide curved vanes for square elbows.
2.8 ACCESS DOORS
Weld doorframe in place. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or
more galvanized steel hinges and tension fasteners. Provide doors as large as practical.
Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed.
2.9 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS (GRAVITY DAMPERS OR SHUTTERS)
Factory-fabricated, with statically and dynamically balanced blades that open automatically
when the fan starts and close by gravity when the fan stops. Provide the edges of blades with
felt or rubber strips to prevent rattling.
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS AND CONNECTIONS
UL 181, CLASS 1, UL LISTED, SMACNA HVACDS, and additional requirements herein

specified. Use to connect between rigid ducts and outlets and terminals. There shall be no
erosion, delamination, loose fibers, or odors from duct into the air stream. Flexible ducts shall be
maximum 8 feet in length. Maximum bend radius shall be twice of the duct diameter.
2.10.1 Materials
Interlocking spiral or helically corrugated type constructed of aluminum.
2.10.2 Insulation and Vapor Barrier
ASTM C 553; minimum 50mm (2 inch) nominal thickness and 48 kg/cu.m. (3-lb/cu ft.) density
The insulation shall be sheathed with a vapor barrier having a maximum water vapor
permeance of 0.02 ppm ASTM F 96. Procedure C, coat ends of insulation with cement to
prevent erosion and delamination.
2.10.3 Joints
Make airtight slip-joints, seal with pressure-sensitive vapor-seal tape or duct sealer, and secure
with metal screws. To prevent insulation compression, place 50 mm (2 inch) wide by one -inch
thick closed cell foam plastic spacer over the joints under vapor barrier such spacer.
2.11 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING
Acoustic duct lining shall not be less than one-inch thick flexible unicellular rubber and
perforated plate. Increase duct sizes indicated to compensate for thickness of lining. Provide 6
duct diameter downstream and upstream from the air handling unit.
6 of 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Installation shall conform to SMACNA HVACDCS and NFPA 90A, Provide mounting and
support of ductwork and accessories including, but not limited to, structural supports, hangers,
vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, and dampers. Install ductwork
accessories as indicated in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Allow
clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service.
3.1.1 Ductwork
When air distribution systems are operated, there shall be no chatter, vibration, or dust marks.
After ducts are thermally or acoustically insulated, ensure airflow area equal to duct cross
section dimensions indicated.
3.1.1.1 Field Changes to Ductwork
Those required to suit the sizes of factory-fabricated equipment actually furnished, shall be
designed to minimize expansion and contraction. Use gradual transitions in field changes as
well as modifications to connecting ducts.
3.1.1.2 Deflectors
Provide in square elbows, duct-mounted supply outlets, take-off or extension collars to supply
outlets, and tap-in branch-off connections. Adjust supply outlets to provide air volume and
distribution as indicated or specified.
3.1.1.3 Access Doors
Provide for maintenance, automatic dampers, volume dampers, coils, thermostats, temperature
controllers, valves, filters, humidifiers and other concealed apparatus requiring service and
inspection in the duct systems.
3.1.1.4 Duct Sleeves and Prepared Openings
Install for duct mains, duct branches, and ducts passing through roofs and ceilings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of sleeves and prepared
openings.
3.1.2 Duct Hangers and Supports
SMACNA HVACDCS, Section 4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide not less than two 25 mm
(one-inch) by 1.5 mm (1/16-inch) galvanized strap-iron hangers spaced one on each side of
duct. Provide seismic restraint complying with SMACNA GFSR. Anchor risers in the center of
the vertical run to allow ends of riser free vertical movements. Attach supports only to structural
framing members and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a
means is provided and approved for preventing the anchors from puncturing the metal decking.
Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide suitable
intermediate metal framing. Where C clamps are used, use retainer clips.
3.1.2.1 Flexible Ducts
Support ducts by hangers every 915 mm (3 feet), unless supported by ceiling construction. Use
stretch flexible air ducts to smooth out corrugations, and long radius elbows, where possible,
using a minimum length to make connections.
7 of 10
3.1.2.2 Flexible Connectors
Provide flexible connectors between fans and ducts or casings and where ducts are of
dissimilar metals. For round ducts, securely fasten flexible connectors by zinc-coated steel
clinch-type draw-bands. For rectangular ducts, lock flexible connectors to metal collars.
3.1.3 Inspection Plates and Test Holes
Provide inspection plates and test ports at points required for work under Section 15996,
“Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing”, in this Division. Locate test ports in straight ducts as far as
practical downstream of fans, change-of-direction fittings, takeoffs, interior to duct accessories,
and similar turbulent flow sections. Test ports shall be factory-fabricated, airtight, and corrosion-
resistant with screw caps and gaskets. Extend caps through insulation.
3.1.4 Flashings
Provide waterproof flashings where ducts pass through exterior walls and roofs. The roofing
contractor shall do flashings.
Tightness: Penetrations shall be weather-tight; fireproof where fire-rated surfaces are

penetrated; vapor-tight to prevent vapor transmission to conditioned space; sound-tight to
prevent sound transmission; and airtight to normally-occupied or finished spaces where
inflammable substances or gases could migrate.
3.1.5 Cleaning of Ducts
Remove all debris and dirt from ducts and wipe clean. Before installing air outlets, use the fan
to blow dry air through entire system at maximum attainable velocity. Provide temporary air
filters on return ducts for this operation.
3.1.6 Air Filters
Install with sealant and gaskets to prevent by-passing of air.
3.1.7 Eliminators
Equip each cooling coil in casings having an air velocity of over 3.0 m/s (600 fpm) through the
net face area with moisture eliminators, unless the coil manufacturer guarantees, over the
signature of a responsible company official, that no moisture will be carried beyond the drip
pans under actual conditions of operation.
3.1.8 Drain Pans, Drain Connections, and Drain Lines
Provide coils and eliminators with drain and drain connections. Where coils are sectionalized,
with one section above the other, install intermediate drain pans. There shall be no entrainment
of water in air stream. Drain condensate from drain pans to the nearest floor drains. Equip
drain lines with U-traps and a seal height 25 mm (one-inch) greater than the maximum static
pressure rating of the fan system.
3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
The Contractor is responsible for the administration and direction of tests. Furnish instruments,
equipment, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. Notify Engineer 14 days before
inspection or testing is scheduled. Correct all defects in the work. Repeat tests until the work is
in compliance.
8 of 10
3.2.1 Air Duct Leakage Tests
Comply with SMACNA HVACALTM. Test ducts, plenums, and casings for air leakage. Prior to
application of insulation, subject new ductwork to static pressure equivalent to that indicated.
Before installing supply outlets, apply temporary caps where outlets will be connected. Connect
a test blower temporarily to inlet end of duct and, by throttling its intake, adjust static pressure in
duct to required value. Read voltage and current to blower motor and total static pressure
across blower wheel. Apply these data to AMCA certified performance table for the test blower
to derive volumetric flow rate (cfm) of air injected into duct. Remove temporary caps and test
blower. Verify the maximum allowable air leakage of the total air that the duct is required to
deliver. Perform the measurement of leakage using a calibrated orifice tube with its individual
calibration curve.
3.2.2 Performance Testing and Balancing
Section 15996, "Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems."
PART 4 - CIRCULAR VAV AND CAV
4.1 AIR VOLUME CONTROL TERMINALS
4.1.1 Installation Instructions:

VAV terminals shall be installed using at least two support brackets (DIN-rail or L-profile), with
anti-vibration rubber under the terminal. Each of these brackets shall be fixed with two
threaded rods to the ceiling slab above.
This installation method:
a. Shall prevent the body of the VAV terminal from high mechanical tension, which could
damage the construction and performance of the terminal.
b. Shall prevent torsion on the VAV terminals, which could cause malfunction of the
damper blades.
c. Provides some flexibility to the final location of the VAV terminals.
d. Use at least 1x diameter straight duct length before the VAV inlet.
e. Additional manual volume control dampers (VCD’s) before the inlet are not required/
recommended.
f. All connections shall be thermally isolated.
g. Pressure sensing tubes of Flo-Cross® airflow sensor shall not be “kinked” or otherwise
obstructed by the external duct insulation.
Installation of circular VAV terminals can be done in a similar way, with the only assumption
that two circular support brackets with anti-vibration rubber (installation clamps) instead of
DIN-rail or L-profile shall be used. To prevent the VAV terminal from rotation, we recommend
to use a complete clamp (support + top bracket), so that the terminal is ‘clammed’ in between.
Optional 4 x Mupro fixing hooks can be used (see drawing).
9 of 10
Duct works (PVC or Metal), diffusers, registers, grilles, VAV boxes and sheet metal shall
either be counted or measured in linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
******
10 of 10
Section VI- Technical Specification Secondary Cables and Wire
for Load Side of Mech’l Equipment
SECTION 15896 – SECONDARY CABLES AND WIRE FOR LOAD SIDE OF MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – SECONDARY CABLES AND WIRE
1.1 SECONDARY CABLES AND WIRE
(1) The cables to be considered as “Secondary Cable and Wire” shall be the cables from
distribution panels to final load.
(2) When possible these secondary cables and wires shall be of the same type as the
main cables. (XLPE multi-core cables)
(3) When wires shall be used for secondary connection (only), the wires shall be in
accordance with the following:
(a) All wires shall be copper, soft-drawn and annealed, shall be of 99%
conductivity, shall be smooth and true of cylindrical form and variation shall
be within 1% of the actual size called for.
(b) All wires and cables shall comply with the requirement of the Underwriters
Laboratories, the A.S.T.M., I.C.E.A. and other relevant Standards as they
apply to the particular usage.
(c) All wires and cables shall be as manufactured from a reputable and approved
manufacturer.
(d) Wires and cables for power and lighting system shall be plastic insulated for
600 volts working pressure type “THHN” type unless otherwise noted on
plans or specified.
(e) All wires for lightings power shall be stranded copper.
(f) For Lighting and power systems no wire smaller than 3.5 mm sq. shall be
used, except for control leads or otherwise specified.
(g) Color Coding
Shall be provided for all service, feeder, branch, control and signaling circuit
conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors, and black for
neutrals. The color of the underground conductors in different voltage
systems shall be as follows:
(i) 230 volts, 1-phase : Phase A-Red

Phase B-Yellow
(ii) 460 volt, 3-phase : Phase A-Red

Phase B-Yellow
Phase C-Blue
(iii) The grounded conductors should be only of yellow/green type.
(h) Splices and Termination Components
Connectors for wires 5.5 mm 2and smaller shall be insulated pressure-type or

twist lock splicing connector. Solder less lugs shall be provided on stranded
conductors.
1 of 4
1.2 CONTROL CABLES
(1) All control cable shall be as JIS, PEC, NEC or equivalent standard. Control cable
shall be rigid copper type with minimum size of 1.0 mm 2, PVC or XLPE insulation.
They shall be of the control type with a standard number of cores of 12, 19, 27 or 37.
(2) The instrumental cable type can be used as well if of the following type:
(a) Collectively screened

(b) No armour
(3) The collectively screened instrument cable type shall be used when electromagnetic
influences are present, or to ease installation.
(4) The instrument cable type shall include only the following standard number of pairs 5,
10, 30 or 50.
1.3 CABLE MARKING AND SPLICES
(1) The Contractor shall develop a cable numbering list to be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
(2) All main and control cables shall be labeled at both ends with clear indication of the
cable number in accordance with the developed cable list.
(3) Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice
or termination is made. For conductors 16 mm 2 and larger, color coding shall be by
plastic-coated self –sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, or heat-
shrink type sleeves. Control circuit terminations shall be identified.
(4) Splices shall be made in accessible locations; splices in conductors 5.5mm 2 and
smaller shall be made with an insulated pressure type connector, splices in conductor
8 mm2 and larger, color coding shall be by plastic-coated self-sticking markers,
colored nylon cable ties and plates, or heat-shrink type sleeves. Control circuit
terminations shall be identified.
1.4 CABLE AND WIRES- INSTALLATION
1.4.1 Secondary Cables and Wires Routing
(1) Secondary cables and wire shall use cable trays or ladder.
(2) Where this is not possible the routing has to be made in accordance with the
following:
(a) Conduits in general shall be Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) with an

interior coating.
(b) Polyvinyl-chloride conduit (PVC) shall be heavy wall, schedule 40, with factory
made bends, couplings and fittings.
(c) No Conduits shall be used in any system smaller than 20mm (3/4 inch)
diameter electric trade size, nor shall have more than four (4) 90 degree
bends in any one run and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided as
directed.
(d) No wire shall be pulled into any conduit until the conduit system is completed
in all details, in the case of concealed work until all rough plastering masonry
2 of 4
has been completed, and in the case of exposed work until the conduit work
has been completed in every detail.
(e) The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to avoid entrance of plaster,
dust and moisture while the construction of building is in progress. All conduits
shall be reamed to remove all burrs.
(f) All pipes and fittings on exposed work shall be IMC and be secured by means
of metal clips, which shall be held in place by means of machine screws.
When running over concrete surface, the screws shall be held in place by
means of expansion sleeves. All pipes on exposed work shall be run at right
angles to and parallel with the surroundings walls. No diagonal runs shall be
allowed and all bends and offsets shall be avoided as much as possible.
Where necessary conduit fittings shall be used. Conduits in all cases, shall be
supported at 1.50 meter intervals maximum.
(g) No splicing of wires shall be made inside the conduit run from equipment to
box or from one box to another box. Splicing shall be done only in boxes.
1.4.2 Insulated Bushings
Bushing shall be made in such way to protect cables and wires as well as allowing easy
maintenance.
PART 2 – PANEL AND CABINETS
2.1 Except when specified, all panels and cabinets shall be of the surface mounted type.
2.2 Standard panels and cabinets, as much as possible, shall be used and assembled on Site. All
panels shall be dead front construction, furnished with trims for mounting as required.
Cabinets shall be code gauge steel with gutters at least 100mm wide and wider if necessary.
The trim for all panels shall be finished in industrial gray enamel over a coat of rust inhibitor.
2.3 Panelboard main bus work shall be ampacity rated to equal or exceed overcurrent protective
device immediately ahead of it. All buswork shall be properly secured to withstand available
short circuit forces at the location.
2.4 Distribution panels shall be equipped with two poles and three poles air circuit breakers of
sizes, voltage ratings and interrupting capacity as called for on the Drawings.
2.5 Panelboard buses: Copper bus bars shall be supported on bases independent of the circuit
breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed
without machining, drilling, or tapping. A separate ground bus marked with a green stripe
along its front shall be provided and bonded to the steel cabinet for connecting grounding
conductors.
2.6 Mounting heights: Panelboards, circuit breakers and disconnecting switches shall be mounted
so the height of the operating handle at its highest position shall not exceed 1.8m from the
floor.
PART 3 – INDIVIDUAL BREAKERS AND SWITCHES
3.1 GENERAL
(1) Individual circuit breakers, safety switches and disconnect switches shall be provided
where indicated on the Drawings or as required by the situation and the price is
deemed to be included in the bid.
(2) Voltage ratings shall be suitable in each case of service application.
3 of 4
(3) Enclosures shall be General Purpose.
(4) Unless otherwise specified, minimum interrupting level for 230 volts circuit breakers
shall be 10 KA.
3.2 OPERATION TYPE
(1) Circuit breakers shall consist of a quick-make, quick-break type entirely trip-free
operating mechanism with contact, arch-interrupter, and thermal magnetic trip unit for
each pole, all enclosed in a molded-phenolic case.
(2) The thermal-magnetic trip unit shall provide time-delayed overload protection in case
of overload or short circuit current in any one pole.
(3) Circuit breaker shall be trip indicating, with the tripped position of breaker handle
midway between “ON” and “OFF” positions.
3.3 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCCB)
(1) Shall be pole 250 volts maximum, 60Hz, rated at 25 amperes with adjustable ground
fault current sensitivity.
(2) RCCB shall provide protection against ground fault (earth-leakage) current.
(3) It shall stay independent in operation using a core balance current transformer for
differential current sensing and tripping.
(4) RCCB shall have complete mounting box and accessories.
(5) RCCB shall be of approved manufacture.
PART 4 – DISCONNECT MEANS
4.1 Disconnect means shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings at motor locations.
Disconnect switches shall be fusible or non-fusible as required and of sizes as indicated on
the Drawings.
4.2 Disconnects shall be KW rated, of sufficient capacity to carry the continuous current of the
load it controls and of the correct voltage rating.
4.3 Air or Gas circuit breakers shall be used where feeder and motor protective means require.
Circuit breaker shall be provided at each motor location where it is not within the sight of
respective control starter, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. All circuit breakers
shall be totally enclosed.
* * * * *
4 of 4
Section VI- Technical Specification Space Temperature Control Systems
SECTION 15971 - SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
B31.1-83 Power piping; Addenda B 31.1 A-84; Addenda B

31.1B-84 Addenda B 31.1 C-84; Addenda B 31.1D-84
B31.5 83 Refrigeration Piping; Addenda B 31.5 A-85
1.1.2 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Publications
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes (AM 80, Am 82)
A 126-84 Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, Specification for
1.1.5 Factory Mutual System (FM) Publications
Approval Guide (1984)
70-84 National Electrical Code (NEC)
1.1.7 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Publications
1976-1 Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards (1976)
1975-4 High Pressure Duct Construction Standards

(1975-4)
1980 Fire Protection Equipment List.
Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements" applies to this section, with the additions
and modifications specified herein.
1.2.1 Description of Work
The work includes providing new automatic space temperature control (ATC) systems including
associated equipment and appurtenances. Provide each system complete and ready for
operation. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with
ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.5, ASHRAE 15, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, NFPA 70,
and SMACNA Low and High Pressure Duct Construction Standards, except as specified or
1 of 15
indicated otherwise. In the publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be
considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should"
wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean
the Engineer. Provide control systems to maintain the conditions indicated, to perform the
functions indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified. Provide control systems of the
electronic, or electric type, or any combination of these types compatible with the existing
controls. Control diagrams showing one type of control system on the drawings are not intended
to show a preference for that type system. Installation shall be made by or under the direct
supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the installation and calibration of
automatic temperature controls (ATC). Control equipment, valves, panels, and dampers shall
bear the manufacturer's name plate. Where the distance from the sensing element to a panel
exceeds the manufacturer's recommended capillary length, provide a remote transmitter
between the sensing element, and the operating and adjusting mechanism at the panel. The
contractor shall verify with the equipment manufacturer/supplier to ensure that the control
system will have no conflict on its operation.
1.2.2 Submittals Required
1.2.2.1 Manufacturer's Data
a. Valves and operators

b. Stand Alone Control Units and Accessories
c. Temperature sensors, including complete wiring and connection diagrams
d. Pressure sensors, including complete wiring and connection diagrams
e. Dew point and humidity sensors, including complete wiring and connection diagrams
f. Switches, relays, including complete wiring and connection diagrams
g. Smoke detection devices
h. Temperature indicators including remote bulb sensor.
i. Damper Actuators
1.2.2.2 Shop Drawings
a. Temperature control schematic and wiring diagrams

b. Sequence of operation for each system and function
c. Control panels
d. Equipment interlocks as specified under "Sequence of Operations"
e. One-line diagrams from sensor and control points to stand alone control unit, including
all components signal values, cables, and terminal markings.
1.2.2.3 Certificates of Compliance
a. Valves
b. Smoke detectors
1.2.2.4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Furnish an operation and maintenance manual for each item of equipment listed under
"Manufacturer's Data." The manuals shall contain full hardware support documentation, which
shall include, without being limited to, the following:
a. General description and specifications

b. Installation and initial checkout procedures
2 of 15
c. Principles and theory of operation

d. Detailed electrical and logical description
e. Complete trouble-shooting procedures, diagrams, and guidelines
f. Complete alignment and calibration procedures for all components
g. Preventive maintenance requirements
h. Detailed schematics and assembly drawings
i. Complete spare parts lists
j. Signal identification and timing diagrams
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Sensors, industrial or commercial grade, shall be compatible with the automatic temperature
control (ATC) equipment provided and shall have accuracies as stated herein. Instrument
characteristics such as hysteresis, relaxation time, span, including maximum and minimum
limits shall be coordinated for all applications of sensors and controls, so that the control system
shall operate smoothly and accurately throughout the design range.
2.1.1 Stand-alone Control Units and Accessories
The system shall utilize intelligent distributed Stand-Alone Control Units to interface sensors
being monitored and equipment being controlled by the system. Each unit shall be
microprocessor based and has the capability to perform the following functions:
a. Evaluate and report changes of state and or value that occur among points associated
with the remote unit.
b. Locally perform direct digital control (DDC) of all common mechanical system functions.
Such functions shall be programmed using a sequential, numbered-statement
programming language.
c. Acquire, process, accept, transfer information and execute commands, to and from the
central computer, network computer, operators, terminal & other remote units or other
input devices.
Each stand-alone control unit shall execute all application programs, calculations and
commands via a 16-bit microcomputer resident in the unit. All data base for each unit
and the operating system and all application programs for each unit shall be stored
within the unit. Each stand-alone control unit shall contain a real time clock to enable
the unit to automatically perform time-based functions.
Each control unit shall be capable of full operation either as a completely independent
unit or as a part of the building wide control system. All units shall contain the
necessary equipment for direct interface to sensors and actuators connected to it.
Control strategies shall be owner definable at multiple control unit locations, and for all
control units in the system from any one operator terminal.
Each stand-alone control unit shall include its own microcomputer direct digital
controller, power supply input/output modules, and battery. The battery shall be
self-charging and be capable of supporting all memory/within the control unit if the
commercial power to the unit is interrupted or lost for a minimum of eight (8) hours.
Each unit shall perform continuous diagnostics and any malfunction shall be
annunciated at the operator's console as well as visually at the remote unit.
3 of 15
Failure of any unit on the system shall not affect the proper operation of the remaining
system components.
The system shall be capable of phased startup. That is, any unit shall be capable of
properly communicating with the rest of the system while remaining units are being
installed.
Surge transient protecting shall be provided in each unit for the purpose of suppressing
induced voltage transients.
All units shall be listed by Underwriters laboratories (UL) against fire and shock hazard
as a signal system appliance unit.
Units shall have all metal cabinets. Each unit including cabinet, power supply, function
cards and termination modules shall be approved by U.L. Each unit shall have a
pin-hinged door and master keyed lock. Remote units shall be capable of proper
operation in an ambient environment of 0 degree C (32 degrees F) and 10% to 90%
RH.
2.1.2 Input / Output Types
Each stand-alone control unit shall be capable of accepting multiple point inputs and outputs.
These shall be of four types corresponding to industry nomenclature. They are as follows:
a. DIGITAL IN for monitoring status, alarms and accumulating pulses.

b. DIGITAL OUT for commanding two and three state devices.
c. ANALOG IN for measuring values
d. ANALOG OUT for positioning set points
It shall be possible for each remote unit to monitor the following types of inputs, without the
addition of equipment outside the remote unit cabinets:
a. Analog Inputs
(1) 4-20mA
(2) Thermistors
b. Digital Inputs
(1) Dry Contact Closure

(2) Pulse accumulator
The remote unit shall directly control electronic actuator and control devices. Each control unit
shall be capable of providing the following control outputs without the addition of equipment
outside the remote unit cabinet:
a. Digital Outputs (contact closure)
(1) Motor Starters, Sizes 1-4
b. Analog Outputs
(1) 4-20mA
(2) 0-16vDC
(3) 0-135 Ohms
4 of 15
2.1.3 Operators Interface
The control system shall permit full operator communication including: obtaining information
about the performance of his system; allowing the operator to change the system operation; and
diagnosing system malfunctions. Operator communication shall be through the use of any one
of the following operator terminals which can directly connected to the remote unit.
a. Printer
b. 17 inch LCD monitor
c. Central Computer
d. Network (Personal) computer
e. Portable Programming Unit
2.1.4 User Programmability
All temperature control strategies shall be definable by the operator through a portable
programming unit. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and
documentation necessary to allow the operator to independently perform the functions listed
below:
a. Read the value of a measured variable (i.e. temperature)

b. Start or stop equipment
c. Monitor the status of equipment being controlled
d. Read the set point of a control loop
e. Determine the control strategies that have been defined for a specific piece of
equipment
f. Generate displays of control strategies

g. Add/delete control loops to the system
h. Add/delete points to the system
i. Creates, modify or delete control strategies
j. Assign sensors and/or actuators to a control strategy
k. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters
l. Enable or disable control strategies
m. Generate hardcopy records of control strategies on a printer
n. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state(s)
2.1.5 Automatic Temperature Control Valves
Provide minimum ANSI Class 125, cast iron (for steel piping systems) valves installed with
stems horizontal or above. Valves shall have flanged end connections, except valves smaller
than 65 mm may have threaded end connections with a union on all but one side of the valve.
Cast iron components shall conform to ASTM A 126, Class B or C.
2.1.6 Self Diagnostics and Alarm Reporting
Each stand alone unit shall contain self diagnostics that continuously monitor the proper
operation of the unit. A malfunction of the unit will be reported, and will inform the operator of
the nature or the malfunction and the control unit affected. It shall be possible to annunciate
malfunction as well as other control unit at a selected operator’s terminal.
5 of 15
2.1.7 Valve Operators
Provide electronic type with spring return so that, in the event of power failure, they will FAIL
SAFE in either the normally open or closed position as indicated or specified. Operators shall
function properly within range of 85 to 110 percent of the motive power of the system.
2.1.8 Temperature Sensors
Provide analog or binary type, as specified or indicated. Analog temperature sensors shall
provide an output signal that varies linearly and continuously with the sensed temperature,
within a specified range, and shall be thermistor or resistance type. Binary temperature sensors
shall provide an output signal that is either ON or OFF depending upon whether the sensed
temperature is above or below the set point temperature and shall be electric type. All sensors
of a particular category in any one building shall be of the same type and manufacturer.
Temperature sensors shall be suitable for one or more of the following mounting styles: room
(space) type, insertion (air duct) type, or immersion (liquid) type. Provide temperature sensors
with the following characteristics:
a. Insertion or Immersion Types -- Stem or tip sensitive type only, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Sensing Elements -- Hermetically sealed, except for bimetal type for room thermostats,
c. Stem, Tip, or Extended Element Construction -- Type 304 stainless steel or copper.
d. External Trim Material -- Completely corrosion resistant to media in which it is inserted

or immersed, with all parts assembled into a watertight (except room type),
vibration-proof, heat resistant assembly.
e. Thermometer Wells -- Of bronze or stainless steel materials; thermal transmission

material shall be compatible with the sensor.
2.1.8.1 Electronic Analog Temperature Sensors
Sensors shall operate throughout the range of minus -40 (-40) to plus 102 degree C (216
degrees F) for normal heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) sensing; and throughout
the range of zero to 260 degrees C (500 degrees F) for high temperature sensing. Where
specified or indicated, sensors shall be individually calibrated to provide an allowable deviation
not to exceed plus minus 0.10 degrees F. Sensors shall have a time constant response to
achieve 63 percent of a step temperature change in 3 seconds and 98 percent of a step
temperature change in 6 seconds in water flowing at 3 fps. All sensors of the same type shall
be interchangeable without subsequent calibration, and shall provide an allowable deviation not
to exceed that defined in the following equation:
D = 0.005 times the absolute value of (X - 70F) + 0.5 F
where D = Allowable Deviation, plus or minus, degrees F

F= degree Fahrenheit
X= Any temperature through out range, minus -1.1.C (30F) to
plus 135 C (275F), or zero to plus 260 C (500F)
2.1.8.2 Outside Air Sensing Type
Provide sun shades to minimize solar effects and shall be mounted to minimize building outside
air film effects.
2.1.9 Pressure Sensors
Construct the entire assembly so that shock, vibration, and pressure surges of 150 percent of
operating pressure range, but not less than 1.77 kg/sq. cm-gauge (25 psig), above or below
6 of 15
scale will neither harm the sensor or affect its accuracy. Provide pressure sensors with the
following characteristics:
a. Ambient Temperature -- 40 to 140 degrees F.
b. Pressure Sensing Elements -- Provide corrosion resistant type.
c. Switches -- Provide snap-action type with platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold-plated
wiping contacts rated for the application consistent with switched voltages and power
levels.
2.1.10 Relative Humidity Sensors
Sensors shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. Sensors mounted outdoors shall be
protected from wind and rain by a suitable weather hood. Provide a suitable shield for sensors
mounted indoor and subject to air velocities greater than manufacturer's recommended limits.
2.1.10.1 Relative Humidity Sensor
Sensor shall be an analog precision resistance or hygro-mechanical gage type relative humidity
detector. Sensor shall have an allowable deviation of plus or minus 1.0 percent of relative
humidity over the range of zero to 100 percent relative humidity.
2.1.11 Fire Protection Devices
Provide Smoke detectors in the supply and return air ducts. Detectors shall be UL listed or FM
approved for duct installation (To be provided by electrical contractor).
2.1.11.1 Smoke Duct Detectors
See Division 16 Section 16722. Provide duct detectors with approved duct housing, mounted
exterior to the duct and with perforated sampling tubes extending across the width of the duct.
Activation of duct detectors shall cause shut down of the associated air handling unit and
operation of dampers; and annunciation or the signal source and tripping of the master fire
alarm box or other building fire alarm transmitter, but shall not cause sounding of the building
interior alarm devices.
2.2 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLY AND WIRING
120 volts or less, 60 Hertz, 2 pole, 3-wire with ground. The devices shall be UL listed or FM
approved.
2.2.1 Relays
Provide open contact, mercury tube or electronic type with dustproof enclosures.
2.2.2 Manual Transfer Switches
Provide with operating levers and index plates showing switch positions and names of
apparatus controlled or other appropriate designations.
2.2.3 Wiring
Provide complete electric wiring for temperature control apparatus, including wiring to
transformer primaries. Control circuit conductors run in same conduit as power circuit
conductors shall have same insulation level as power circuit conductors. Circuits operating at
more than 100 volts shall be in accordance with Section 16402, "Interior Wiring Systems."
Circuits operating at 100 volts or less shall be defined as low voltage and shall be run in rigid or
flexible conduit, metallic tubing, metal raceways or wire way, armored cable, or multi-conductor
cable. Provide switches and fuses for the protection and convenient operation of the system.
7 of 15
Aluminum sheathed cable or aluminum conduit may be used but shall not be buried in concrete.
Protect exposed wiring from abuse and damage in an approved manner. Wire for low voltage
AC shall be insulated copper No. 20 AWG or larger and shall conform to NFPA 70, Type MTW,
THHN, TFFN or BN. For low voltage DC and electronic circuits carrying less than 0.5 amperes,
cables of two or more conductors, not smaller than No. 22 AWG Solid copper if shielded or No.
20 AWG solid copper if not shielded, may be used in lieu of individual wires. Shield cable
carrying analog signals. Cable shall terminate in solder or screw type terminal strips. Cable
shall not be tapped at intermediate points. Wires, whether individual or in cables, shall be
intermediate color coded or numbered for identification. Cables terminating in screw type
terminal strips shall have pressure type connectors. Wire in physical contact with compression
screw will not be acceptable.
2.3 TEMPERATURE INDICATORS
Provide an indicator with remote bulb sensors. Indicators shall have midpoint readings
approximately equal to the normal temperature of air. Provide indicators with stainless steel
case, 90 mm (3.5 inch) minimum diameter dial with glass face gasketed within the case;
accuracy within one percent of scale range. Provide scale range suitable for intended service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide all necessary, wiring and conduit to connect the ATC components to secure an
operational ATC system.
3.1.1 Wiring
Wiring from sensors and control devices, indicated or specified shall be provided to terminal
blocks located in the Stand Alone Control Units. Permanently mark the terminal blocks and
wires for identification.
3.1.2 Workmanship
Wiring and the installation thereof shall conform to NFPA 70.
3.1.3 Identification
Label or code each field wire at each end. Permanently label or code each point of all field
terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Color coded cable with annotated cable
diagrams may be used to accomplish cable identification.
3.1.4 Temperature Sensors
Stabilize sensors to permit on-the-job installations that will require minimum field adjustments or
calibrations. Temperature sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and adaptable to each
type of application in such a manner as to allow for quick, easy replacement and servicing
without special tools or skills. Strap-on mountings, utilizing helical screw stainless steel clamps,
shall be permitted on hot water piping up to 75 mm (3-inch) sizes only, when pipe is cleaned to
bright metal and strap on bulb and pipe is suitably insulated after installation. All other liquid
temperature sensors shall be provided with wells. Outdoor installations shall be of weatherproof
construction, designed to exclude driving rain or snow, or in NEMA 3R enclosures. Sensors
shall be with brushed- aluminum or brushed stainless steel enclosures where located in finished
spaces.
3.1.5 Duct Sensors
Provide sensors in ducts in general location indicated on drawings; specific location within duct
shall allow accurate sensing of the air properties indicated or specified. Do not locate in dead
air spaces or positions obstructed by such items as ducts or equipment. The location of
8 of 15
installation shall be within the vibration and velocity limits of the sensing element. Where an
extended surface element is required to properly sense the average or lowest air temperature, it
shall be positioned and securely mounted within the duct in a manner approved by the sensor
manufacturer. Temperature sensing elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and
supports to respond to air temperature only. Provide separate duct flange for each sensing
element; securely seal ducts where elements or connections penetrate duct. Seal penetrations
of duct insulation vapor barrier with vapor barrier coating compound to provide a vapor tight
covering. Mount sensor enclosures so that they may be removed and serviced without
disturbance or removal of the duct installation or vapor barrier.
3.1.6 Pipe Sensors
Provide all sensors measuring temperatures in pressure vessels or in pipes larger than 25 mm
(1 inch) in diameter, except as specified herein, with wells properly fabricated for the service.
Wells shall be non-corrosive to the medium being measured and shall have sufficient physical
strength to withstand all (including test) pressures and velocities to which they are subjected.
Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in the piping at
elbows to affect proper flow across the entire area of the well; wells may either look up-stream
or down-stream. Provide suitable thermal transmission material within the well to speed the
response of temperature measurement. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal
transmission material and allow for easy removal. Well shall not restrict flow area to less than
70 percent of line-size-pipe normal flow area.
3.1.7 Pressure Sensors
Provide sensors in NEMA 3R enclosures and provide sensors which are corrosion resistant
throughout.
3.1.8 Temperature Indicators
Mount temperature indicators to allow readability when standing at floor level.
3.2 ADJUSTMENTS
Adjust controls and equipment to maintain the conditions indicated, to perform the functions
indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified.
3.3 INSTRUCTING OPERATING PERSONNEL
Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Engineer, provide the services of
a competent technician regularly employed by the Contractor of the temperature controls for the
instruction of the Airport personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each automatic
space temperature control system. The period of instruction shall be for not less than
three-8-hour working days.
3.4 NAMEPLATES
Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all control items listed or shown in the submittal and
approved control diagrams. Each inscription shall identify its function; such as mixed air
controller,' 'cold deck sensor,' and when applicable, its position. Laminated plastic shall be
3mm thick Melamine plastic, black with white center core. Surface shall be a matte finish. All
corners shall be square. The lettering shall be accurately aligned and engraved into the white
core. Size of nameplates shall be 25 mm by 65 mm minimum. Lettering shall be minimum 6mm
high normal block lettering. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Mount
charts and schedules under glass, in a frame, and place where directed near each system.
Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule to the Engineer prior to final acceptance.
9 of 15
3.5 TESTING
Contractor shall submit two copies of the operation and maintenance manual and two copies of
a test plan to the Engineer not less than 14 days prior to acceptance testing. Test plan shall, as
a minimum, indicate how ATC system is to be tested, what variables will be monitored during
test, and what criteria for acceptance should be used. Indicate how operation of HVAC system
and ATC system in all seasonal conditions shall be simulated. If the Engineer witnesses any
tests, such tests shall be subject to his approval. If the Engineer elects not to witness the tests,
Contractor shall provide performance certification.
3.5.1 Field Testing
Upon completion of 72 hours of continuous HVAC and ATC systems operations and before final
acceptance of the work, Contractor shall test the automatic temperature control systems in
service with the ventilating and air conditioning systems to demonstrate conformance with the
contract requirements. Test controls through every cycle of operation, including simulation of
each season in so far as possible. Test safety controls to demonstrate performance of their
required function. Test data terminal cabinet for the presence of properly identified and
accurate signals at each terminal connected to a sensor. Test for proper response to signals
transmitted to the ATC controllers and actuators. Contractor shall furnish instruments, power
supply, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. If any of the automatic space
temperature control equipment is proved to be defective in workmanship or material, adjust,
repair, or replace the system. Repeat the tests to demonstrate conformance with the contract
requirements.
PART 4 - CONTROLS DEVICES ACCESSORIES
4.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall supply and install all the control equipment, auxiliary devices,
instruments, etc. to perform satisfactory operations of all systems described in the
specifications and/or indicated on the drawings. The drawings and the specifications are
complemented each to the other. The sequence of operation of each system or piece of
equipment is specified either under the equipment specification section or detailed on the
drawings.
a. Control system shall be of the electric, or electronics, (solid state) or a combination of

them to provide the required sequence of operation. Controls shall have interface to
building management and DCC systems.
b. Provide all relays, switches, gauges, sources of electricity and all other auxiliaries,
accessories and connections necessary to make a complete operable system.
c. Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made.
d. Unless otherwise noted, install all wall mounted thermostats 1400 mm above the
floor, measured to the center line of instruments.
e. Insertion type thermostats shall have adjusting head at eye level, wherever
practicable, for adjustment and calibration.
f. Install all control valves horizontally with the power unit up.
g. Unless stated otherwise temperatures shall be controlled within plus or minus

2°F(1°C) and humidity within plus or minus 5 per cent of the set point.
10 of 15
h. Provide positive positioner devices on all controls operated in sequence and/or where
specified or required to maintain the set point within the required limits without
override.
i. After completion of installation, all automatic controls shall be regulated and adjusted
and placed in complete operating conditions subject to the approval of the Engineer
and a maintenance brochure including all operating instructions, specifications and
sheets for all instruments shall be submitted by the Contractor.
j. Electric control systems shall conform to the requirements shown on the Drawings
and shall effect the operation of the air conditioning systems contemplated by the
design.
k. After all controls, valves and motors have been connected, test the systems in the
presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of each automatic control
system to meet contract requirements.
l. Basic components shall be standard catalogue products of single reputable

Manufacturer.
m. Do not duplicate factory furnished controls of unitary equipment like refrigeration

machines, fan coil units, etc. but modify them to conform to these specifications.
Obtain from the manufacturer of unitary equipment, and submit written certification
that proposed control circuit modifications do not conflict with or invalidate
Manufacturer’s equipment warranty.
n. Instrument wire shall be run in conduits separate from other types of writing and shall
terminate on identified terminal strips.
o. The wire terminals on instruments shall not be used as junction points to facilitate
removal of instruments without disturbing others.
p. Instruments shall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service
engraved on the tag. Tags shall be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be
black with white lettering.
q. The equipment shall be restarted after a power failure in the same sequence and with
the same time delays as specified for normal start-up.
4.3 CONTROL PANEL AND CONTROL SYSTEM
a) Control panels shall be installed where shown and as required on the Drawings. Each
panel shall include start-stop and pilot lights for all major equipment being controlled
together with their starters and necessary heat detector, alarm and other related
safety and fire alarm systems.
b) The control system shall be of DDC type and shall be complete with all necessary
transformers, thermostats, valves, dampers, damper operators, and associated
regulators required to maintain the conditions desired together with the
thermometers, gauges, and other necessary accessories and the control wiring.
c) Shop drawings shall be schematic diagrams showing all the components of the
control systems and the interconnection scheme. Each component shall be identified
by name and/or schedule number of equipment item it controls.
d) Manufacturer’s detailed Shop Drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all
equipment to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
11 of 15
4.4 CONTROL DEVICES
a. TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS (With Remote Sensors)
Shall be supplied complete with metal cases and manual set point adjusters.
Room type controllers shall be mounted 1800 mm above the floor and in an
accessible location.
Panel-mounted controllers shall be supplied with metal mounting adaptor plate and
mounting assembly.
Controllers shall be designed for a throttling range of 2°F (1 °C) for a 3Vdc output
change with a control dial range 55-85 °F (13-29°C) and shall be suitable for ambient
operating limits 40-135 °F (4-57 °C).
b. DAMPERS
(1) Motorized automatic dampers shall be of the louver type with not less than 13
gauge welded steel frames and galvanized finish. Blades shall have
interlocking edges, stainless steel side springs (or vinyl or neoprene gaskets),
and Teflon-coated stainless steel thrust washers. Blades shall be edged with
neoprene if the damper is to operate in outside air service either as an intake
or discharge damper. Damper blades shall have steel trunnions mounted in
nylon or iolite bearings.
(2) Dampers shall be not more than 1200mm. in length between bearings.
Modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type unless specified

otherwise. Blades shall be not over 200mm. in width and shall not be less
than 16 gauge galvanized steel. Hardware shall be zinc plated. One damper
actuator shall be provided for each 1.5 sq. meter of damper area.
(3) Provide parallel blade dampers arranged for maximum turbulence and mixing
of outside air with return air. Arrange dampers as necessary to prevent
stratification or provide baffles necessary to correct stratification problems.
(4) Provide dampers of low leakage construction, so designed that the maximum
leakage shall be 10 cfm/ft2 (0.005 m3/s/m2) of damper with 4” WG. (1 Kpa)
Pressure differential applied.
c. Temperature Sensors
Duct temperature sensors shall have their sensing elements immersed inside the
duct and the wiring enclosure mounting on the outer surface of the duct and shall be
of the averaging duct type with linear output and suitable for ambient limits -40 to 250
°F (-40 to 150 °C).
Sensor shall be complete with a steel wiring enclosure with ½” (13mm) conduit
knockout (top and bottom) and a 5 feet (1.5m) long sensing element.
Sensors shall be of corrosion proof construction.
Sensing elements for water pipe mounting shall be of the rod and tube type with
linear output and shall be furnished complete with separable stainless steel bulb wells
filled with heat conductive compound. Sensors shall be factory calibrated and
tamperproof. If easily adjustable sensors are provided, they shall be located inside
metal enclosures with cylinder lock and key to prevent unauthorized setting.
12 of 15
d) Room Thermostats
(1) Shall have metal locking covers and shall be provided with concealed
adjustment means, and with thermometers.
Each room thermostat shall be supplied with metal auxiliary mounting bases
and metal subbase for surface mounting applications; plus a plastic guard to
protect thermostat from damage.
(2) Line voltage on/off thermostats shall be of the bimetal operated snap action
switch. They shall be underwriter’s laboratories Inc., listed at an electrical
rating appropriate to the application. Thermostat shall operate on 2°F (1°C)
differential and shall have a control dial range 55-85 °F (13-29 °C).
(3) Low voltage thermostats shall be of the self contained type with a 1000 ohm
sensing element and an amplifier. Thermostat shall have a control dial range
55-85 °F (13-29°C) and a throttling range of 2°F (1°C) for a 3 Vdc output
change.
4.5 Motorized Valves and Actuators
4.5.1 Motorized Control Valves- Type B
Motorized Control Valve shall be low voltage, 2-way, 2 modulating flow through operation of
motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from proportional controller. To have
the following features:
a. Application: As indicated on plans (AHUs and FCUs).
b. Single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze body
and removable brass seat on 15 to 50 mm sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron
body and removable bronze seat on 65mm sizes and above; stainless steel stem and
composition disc with removable throttling plugs.
c. reversing type motor, oil-immersed gear train, die- cast aluminium case, dual stroke
(90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast aluminium cover with
built-in transformer.
d. Linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising

roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 160 lb. seal-off
force
e. Valve rated 240 deg. F maximum water temperature and 125 psi maximum pressure
for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections.
f. Motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.
g. Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5 times the
full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted otherwise.
h. Valve analogue signal to be 2-10 vdc or 4-20m A.
i. Valves should be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected
pump pressure.
13 of 15
4.5.2 Motorized Control Valves – Type C
Motorized Control Valve shall be low voltage, 2-way, 2-position, providing open-closed control
of water flow through operation of motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from
an on-off switch. To have the following features:
a. single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze body
and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron
body and removable bronze seat on 50 to 80 mm sizes; stainless steel stem and
composition disc with removable throttling plugs.
b. reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die-cast aluminium case, dual
stroke (90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast aluminium cover
with built-in transformer.
c. linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising

roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 160 lb. seal-off
force
d. valve rated 240 deg. F maximum water temperature and 125 psi maximum pressure
for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections.
e. motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.
f. Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5 times the
full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted otherwise.
g. valve analogue signal to be 2-10 vdc or 4-20m A.
h. Valves should be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected
pump pressure.
4.5.3 CONTROL MOTOR (Actuator)
a. for valves and dampers specifications.
b. Electric, reversible, spring-return, proportional type complete with linkage.
c. Suitable for damper and motorized valve operation.
d. Shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action as specified.
e. Damper actuator shall be suitable for 220/50 Hz power supply.
Stand-alone control units and accessories, input and output devices, valve operators and
sensors shall be the number of sets actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
14 of 15
******
15 of 15
Section VI- Technical Specifications BMS Instrumentation
SECTION 15972 - BMS INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
a. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.
b. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to supply, install, wire
calibrate and commission the electronic control and monitoring system instrumentation as
specified in the point schedules, in this specification and as required to make a complete
and functional system.
c. Coordinate instrumentation provisions with the BMS equipment specified in Section 16965.
a. Instrumentation work shall be performed by one firm specializing in the installation of control
systems for building environmental control or by the qualified BMS installer.
b. Products referenced under this Section establish the minimum acceptable standards of
product quality, features and performance. Products provided under this Section shall be
provided by the same supplier as the BMS system.
c. Engineer in-charge supervising the work shall be a duly Registered Electronics Engineer as
required by R.A 9292 and revised National Building Code or as Registered Professional
Mechanical Engineer experienced in BMS for HVAC System Application (R.A.8495).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RELATED WORK
a. Where the application of any special software package requires additional instrumentation
to meet the requirements specified, provide the necessary instrumentation at no additional
cost whether or not such instrumentation is identified.
b. Any required additional instrumentation shall meet the requirements of this Section. Submit
details for review prior to installation.
c. Provide actuators and terminal unit controller for all VAV, constant volume controllers, fan
coil units and other terminal devices. Where possible, have actuators and controls installed
in the terminal unit manufacturer’s factory.
2.2 PRESSURE TO CURRENT TRANSMITTERS
a. Provide pressure to current transmitters, Instrument Code C1 having the following minimum
specifications:
1 of 14
(1) Internal materials of the transducer suitable for continuous contact with the applicable
media.
(2) Output signal of 420 mA.
(3) Output variation of less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage variations of 10%.
(4) Combined non-linearity, repeatability and hysteresis effects not to exceed 0.5% of full
scale output over entire range.
(5) Integral, accessible zero and span adjustments.
(6) Operating temperature range of -10 to 50 deg C with 5% to 90% RH non-condensing.
(7) Temperature effect of 1.5% full scale 50 deg. C or less.
(8) over pressure input protection to a minimum of twice maximum working input
pressure.
(9) Output short circuit and open circuit protection.
(10) Dustproof housing.
(11) Shock and vibration protection.
2.3 ELECTRONIC PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
a. Provide current to pneumatic transducers, Instrument Code C2 with the following minimum
specifications:
(1) Input range suitable for interfacing to the digital to analog converter output of the DDC
controller.
(2) Directly proportioned output range as appropriate for modulation of the controlled
device.
(3) Output air capacity of 0.27 L/s maximum.
(4) Combined non-linearity repeatability and hysteresis effects not to exceed 2% of span.
(5) Span adjustment of 14 to 140 kPa.
(6) Short circuit protection.
(7) Response time 60 seconds for final stability.
2.4 PRESSURE ELECTRIC SWITCHES
a. Provide SPDT snap acting switch, Instrument: Code C4 rated for 8 amperes at 220V.
b. The pressure range shall be 0 to 130 kPa.
c. Provide adjustable set point from 20.6 to 130 kPa and the differential adjustable between
12.7 and 41.1 kPa.
2.5 MOTOR CONTROL RELAYS
a. Provide motor start/stop control relays, Instrument Type D1 in dustproof housing.
2 of 14
b. Provide pick up rating and time and hold rating as required for individual applications.
c. Provide motor control relays from one manufacturer.
d. Provide input operating voltage to be compatible with the BMS digital output equipment.
e. Where hand/off/auto (HOA) switches are provided on the MCC, the BMS digital output
shall control the motor only in the auto position.
f. Do not override other interlocks providing safety control.
g. Provide shock and vibration protection.
h. Provide required wiring interconnections between the motor control relays and the motor
starters.
2.6 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AND RELAYS
a. Provide current transformers and relays, Instrument Code D2 to indicate motor status.
b. Provide SPDT output relay suitable for sensing by the BMS digital input subsystem.
c. Provide output relay with trip adjustment, field accessible, over 0-100% of range.
Dead band adjustment shall be to, at maximum, 10% of range.
d. Long term setting drift of current transformer and relay combination not to exceed 5% full
range/6 months.
e. Provide current transformer and relay with over current and over voltage protection.
f. Operating ambient temperature range of -10 deg C to plus 50 deg C with 5% to 90% RH
non-condensing.
2.7 MOTOR STATUS CONTACTS
a. Provide status inputs, Instrument Code D3 for all motors using auxiliary contacts from
motor starters where available or from auxiliary relays wired into the motor starter circuit.
2.8 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
a. Select the differential pressure range of the switch, Instrument Code D4 to suit the
application.
b. Provide switch with adjustable set point.
c. Provide switch with SPDT contacts rated at 5 amperes at 220V AC.
d. Mount the switch with diaphragm in a vertical plane.
e. Indicate flow for pumps and fans by means of a current sensitive relay which opens an
electrical contact as differential pressure falls below pre-adjusted pressure range setting.
3 of 14
2.9 DAMPER OPERATORS - ELECTRIC
a. Provide dumper operators for all motorized dampers, including those supplied under other
sections of this Specification including smoke, combination fire and smoke, factory
fabricated air handling units, exhausters, and terminal control units.
b. Select and size electric damper operators. Actuator shall operate on 2-10VDC, 4-20ma
DC, 220 volt, or an increase/decrease signal. Provide power to operators from closest
source.
c. Securely mount each damper operator on a rigid bracket. Mount each damper operator
outside of air stream in a readily accessible location. Damper operators may be installed in
walk in type plenums where design minimum mixed air temperature is not less than 2 deg
C.
d. Provide electric damper operators and linkage for inlet vane control. Select operators to
ensure adequate torque for proper operation.
e. Provide electrically powered damper operators in Emergency Generator Rooms. Connect

to the emergency power system.
f. Operators for VPIM fans will be supplied with that equipment.
2.10 MOTORIZED DAMPERS
a. Supply control dampers of the types and sizes required by the systems. For those
dampers not supplied under this Section, obtain information which is required to interface
with control system from supplier.
b. Supply opposed and parallel blade action dampers. Where design minimum outdoor
temperature is -4 deg C or lower, outdoor and relief damper leakage rate shall not exceed
11 cfm/ft5 at 3 inches wg. (96 1/s/m5 at 745Pa) for parallel blade dampers.
c. Supply opposed blade dampers for two position control and parallel blade for mixing
control of outside and return air.
d. Damper frames shall be formed channels of not less than 13 gauge galvanized steel or
extruded aluminium with mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting.
e. Damper blades shall be of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel or extruded aluminium.
Blades on multi blade dampers shall not exceed 200 mm in width and 1200mm in length.
f. Blade shaft bearings shall be corrosion resistant and constructed of oil impregnated
sintered bronze or nylon.
g. Ensure tight seal when dampers are closed. Provide fire retardant synthetic seals on
damper blade edges and on the top and bottom. Provide stainless steel jamb seals.
Leakage shall be less than 1% of the maximum air flow rate specified for the application.
When subjected to 1000Pa differential pressure except as specified elsewhere.
h. Provide dampers suitable for operation within the temperature range of -26.1 deg C to 93.3
deg C.
4 of 14
i. Provide corrosion resistant zinc plated steel and brass blade linkage hardware. Secure
blades to zinc plated shafts with zinc plated bolts and nuts.
j. Prepare and submit for review, detailed Shop Drawings of motorized damper assembles
showing modular arrangement of dampers, operators and structural framing.
2.11 DAMPER STATUS SWITCH
a. Provide magnetic reed switch type damper status switches activated by damper blade.
Mount securely on damper frames. Instrument Code C6.
b. Provide SPDT switches with contract rating of not less than 5 amperes at 220V AC.
2.12 FILTER GAUGES
a. Filter gauges are provided by Division 15.
2.13 LEVEL SWITCHES
a. Float type, tank mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg C.
b. Float type, pit mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg C.
Instrument Code D6.
2.14 LEVEL SENSOR
a. Capacitive level sensor, equal to MAgnatrol, complete with sensor rods, water tight
enclosure, continuous 2-10V or 4-20 mA output. Instrument Code D7.
2.15 GAS DETECTORS
a. Provide detectors suitable for carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and refrigerant and
ammonia detection. Instrument Code K6.
b. Provide electronic detectors, with scale range and set points suitable for the gas being
detected and in compliance with legislation for hazardous gasses.
c. Provide digital or continuous 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA input to BMS as appropriate for
detection and control.
2.16 INTERFACE CONTACTS AND CONTROL
a. Snap acting switch, rated for 5 amps at 220 VAC, or digital input. Instrument Code F1 to
F3.
b. ensure contacts and signal are compatible with BMS and other systems being interfaced.
5 of 14
c. Provide 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output from BMS to variable speed drives or air flow volume
control devices. Instrument Code C7.
d. Provide pulse totalizing and conversion from building power meters. Instrument Code C8.
(1) Power meter consists of CT’s and PT’s. Provide accuracy equal to that of the utility
meter.
(2) Provide time based measurement with intervals of, at minimum 1 minute, for power
demand control.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
a. Meet applicable codes, each manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures and

Division 16 requirements.
b. Install all equipment so as to be mechanically stable and allow easy access. Fix as
necessary to wall or floor. Provide anti-vibration mounting where required to properly
isolate the equipment.
c. Install all equipment in locations providing adequate ambient conditions for its specified
functioning, allowing for adequate ventilation.
d. Provide complete shop drawings for review.
e. Review proposed location of any equipment with Owner prior to its installation.
f. Where the point schedules indicate auxiliary contact provision, provide all instrumentation,
wiring, conduit, power supplies and services as required to integrate these points into the
BMS.
g. Provide interposing and motor control relays at the local item of equipment or at the
associated MCC as applicable. Provide all relays, wiring, conduit, power supplies and
services as required to integrate these points into the BMS.
h. Wire all equipment which is part of the same control loop to the same field panel.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
a. Provide for each piece of instrumentation and end device, a 50 mm x 75 mm plastic

nameplate embossed to indicate the following:
(1) Mnemonic for point
(2) Remote field panel and termination
(3) English language description
(4) Field panel
6 of 14
3.3 WIRING
a. Provide all wiring required for Instrumentation. Install in IMC conduit, and otherwise
comply with Division 16 requirements. Approved plenum cable wire may be used where
allowed by code.
b. Provide power wiring from nearest emergency powered panel to each field device as
required.
c. Provide necessary relays required to interconnect equipment.
d. Install wiring parallel and perpendicular to building planes.
3.4 FACTORY BUILT EQUIPMENT
a. Factory built equipment such as roof top air conditioners, make up air units. VAV
terminals, water source heat pumps, etc., require control devices supplied by this Section,
refer to individual Specification Sections for exact requirements.
b. Provide all required components to completely interface with the BMS, including relays,
actuators, thermostats, terminal control units and other devices to make a complete and
operational system.
c. Install thermostats and control wiring for equipment where thermostats are factory
supplied.
3.5 WARNING NOTICES
a. Place warning notices at the MCC Panel, local starter and on or close to all motors under
BMS control.
b. Make the notices conspicuous with bold lettering to advise that the motor is under BMS
control and may start at any time without warning. Submit sample notice for review prior to
installation.
7 of 14
3.6 LEVELS OF BMS PERFORMANCE TESTING
Level 3 – Level 2 – Level 1 –

L Building Zone Sub-system and Component
Test: Test: Test:

Zones Chillers Analogue inputs
Air handling units Temperature
Building Any systems/equipment sensors
Specified in the Humidity sensors
Contract Pressure sensors
Voltage
Current
Flowrate
Digital inputs
Relays
Switches
Analogue outputs
Actuators
Test: Test: Digital Outputs

Relays
Temperature Systems response to
Inputs
Humidity
Control loops
Light
Sequencing
Carbon dioxide
Ventilation rate
Energy consumption Test for:
Accuracy
Operation
Alarms
Address
Fig.4.3.3.2.2 – Levels of BMS Performance Testing
(ii) Preliminary check
All major components are installed in accordance with the drawings.
(iii) Electrical Supply & Batteries
To check for correct power supply to the CCMS
(iv) Visual/Physical inspection
The contractor shall submit a checklist but not limited to the following for visual checking:
1. BMS wiring;
8 of 14
START
Is there a feedback
signal for the DO?
N
Does the feedback

signal give correct N
indication?
N
Y Is there an input to
monitor the effect of N
the DO?
Y All
completed?
Y
END
Does this input give

correct indication of N
the operation of
DO?
Does a visual
Y check indicate N
correct operation
of DO?
Y
Next DO
N Is CCMS DO relay
operating?
Set switch to
auto
N Is CCMS hand/off/auto
on auto?
Y
Y
Repeat test
N Is controller relay
N Is DO overridden?
operating?
Is DO N
interlocked?
Y
Y Check Check device
Check strategy Check reason controller under control
Y configuration
for overridden
Check reason
for interlock Delete
Rectify fault
override if not
required
Delete if not
required
9 of 14checking flow chart

Fig.2 Digital output (DO)
Fig. 3 Analogue output (AO) Checking flow chart
START
Is there a feedback N
signal for the AO?
Does the feedback

signal give correct
N
indication?
N Is there an input to
Y monitor the effect of N
the AO?
Y All
Y completed?
Y
END
Does this input give
correct indication of N
the operation of AO?
Y Does a visual check

indicate correct N
operation of AO?
Y
Next AO
Repeat
test
N Is CCMS AO indicator
lamp show correct
operation of AO?
Check why
N Is CCMS
hand/off/auto on
Set switch
auto?
to auto not on auto
Y
Set switch
Is device
to auto N hand/off/auto
on auto?
N Is AO
overridden?
Is AO N
interlocked? Y
Y
Check Is controlled device ON
Y
Check reason for i.e. power supply?
Relay operating?
N
Check override
strategy
reason for
configuratio
interlock
n
10 of 14
Delete if not
required
START
Delete
override if not Y
required
Check device Put power on
Alarm levels, under control to device
dead bands, time N Set correct levels,
delays as dead bands, delays
specified?
Y
Check consequences of
forcing an alarm
Is it safe to force
N an alarm?
N Is alarm
enabled? Y
Adjust alarm level to
force alarm
Enable alarm Y
Is alarm message
category destination N Set correct alarm
correct? message destination etc.
Y
force alarm

force alarm
N

force alarm
Is it safe to force
an alarm?
END
Fig.4 Alarm checking flow chart
11 of 14
START
Set up log for control

variable
Check control loop

stability
Is response N
steady? Tune loop
Y
Alter set point
Log change in controlled

variable over time
N Is finally steady
state response
similar to set
point?
Is control plant
N operating
efficiently?
Repair
plant
Y
Y
Log change in controlled Is response N Tune loop setting gain
variable over time steady? integral & derivative values
Repeat test Y
Complete checklist
Repeat test
Next loop
All completed?
steady?
Y
END
Fig.5 Control loop checking flow chart
12 of 14
List of Calibrated Instrument Necessary for the T & C works
Serial No. of
Type Model Date of Calibration
Instrument
Note: * Delete if not applicable
13 of 14
Tested / Checked by : Signature – Post:

(Name of contractor’s
Representative)
( )
Post:
Tel. No.:
Date :
Post:
Tel. No.:
Date :
Witnessed by: Signature – Tel. No.:
(Name(s) of *PBSE/PBSI) ( )
Date :
Post:
Tel. No.:
Date :
******
14 of 14
Section VI- Technical Specifications BMS Inspection and Acceptance Testing
SECTION 15973 - BMS INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED

a. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.
b. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to demonstrate to the
Owner and the Consultant, which the equipment, networks, installations, programs and
services supplied, installed and tested under this Contract meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents in all respects.
c. Engineer in-charge supervising the work shall be a duly Registered Electronics Engineer as
required by R.A. 9292 and revised National Building Code or as Registered Professional
Mechanical Engineer experienced in BMS for HVAC System Application (R.A.8495).
1.2 SPECIAL TESTING AND USE OF EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE TESTING
a. The Owner/Consultant reserves the right to use any piece of equipment, device or material
installed under this Contract for such reasonable lengths of time and at such times as they
may require to make complete and thorough tests of same before undertaking the final
acceptance testing. Do not construe such tests as evidence of acceptance of any part of
the contract. No claim for damage will be made by the Contractor for any injury or
breakage to any parts of the above due to the aforementioned tests where caused by
weakness or inaccuracy of the parts or by defective materials or workmanship of any kind
whatsoever.
b. Conduct such operation following prior agreement between the Owner/Consultant and the
Contractor as to the format and scheduling of the tests.
c. Arrange work to enable the Owner to change over local air handler control systems to the
new system for extended operating periods to ensure proper functioning of software and
hardware.
d. Do not withhold consent to the execution of such operation when reasonably requested by
the Owner/Consultant.
e. Make BMS available for the use of the Owner once the individual work items are such that
they can be used for their intended function(s) as detailed herein.
f. The warranty period shall not commence until the Owner’s Certificate of substantial
Completion is issued.
g. The Owner and/or Consultant reserve the right to defer acceptance testing on any item
until all work included in this Contract has been completed by the Contractor or can be fully
tested.
h. Draft documentation must be provided before acceptance testing will emmence.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST PROVISIONS
a. Provide all equipment, software, consumable items, personnel and facilities as

required to reasonably execute any factory or site acceptance tests, including
any signal simulation equipment.
1 of 13
2.2 DOCUMENTATION
a. Submit preliminary as-built drawings and documentation at least 4 weeks prior to the
commencement of final acceptance testing. The intent is that this documentation may be
used by the Owner and Consultant during the execution of the final acceptance testing.
b. Submit data relevant to point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks, software
routines and associated parameters and other pertinent information for the operating
system and data base.
c. Submit point log sheets to the Consultant at least 4 weeks prior to the test. Submit sample
point log sheets for Consultant review prior to completion and final data entry.
d. Submit for acceptance by the Consultant, a total demonstration test plan before
commencement of each test/ inspection. All hardware and software system components
and all other work items shall be fully tested/inspected during the demonstration.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING
a. Perform a complete demonstration of the BMS real-time responsibilities of surveillance and

command prior to online operation.
b. Advise the Consultant and Owner, in writing, at least 2 weeks in advance of readiness to
perform tests.
c. Note deficiencies and correct before starting and continuing tests. Perform calibration and
operational checks prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing for all relevant
system parts.
d. Perform final acceptance testing all the following defined levels:
(1) per points basis

(2) per system basis
(3) Software functions and packages basis
(4) per building basis
(5) Total BMS basis
e. Make available on site for the duration of these tests, all installation, engineering, software,
system and personnel, required to enable test completion.
f. Demonstrate the specified performance of the BMS software and hardware, at all levels
from individual end devices through to total system operation and the proper
operation/undertaking of all other items of work performed under this Contract.
g. Specifically orient acceptance test procedures to demonstrate the satisfactory operation of

aspects of the operator interface terminals.
h. Perform a complete and detailed calibration and operational check for each individual BMS
point and control function contained within the supplied system. Check to ensure that all
equipment, software, network elements, modules and circuits provided are functioning to
meet the Specification and record on log sheets.
2 of 13
i. Repeat acceptance testing until acceptable performance has been established.
3.2 FACTORY TESTING
a. Factory testing of hardware or software shall not replace, in whole or in part, site
acceptance testing as detailed in this Section.
b. Submit for Consultant review, proposed format of factory tests.
PART 4 – PRE- START –UP / PRE – COMMISIONING CHECKS (BMS)
It is important for a testing and commissioning to have a pre-start check or a pre-commissioning

check, to lessen errors and faults. This is done by the BMS Engineering before the functional test.
4.1 PRE-START CHECKS
4.1.1 Filled up all necessary Safety requirement forms.
4.1.2 Complete all the tools and equipments below necessary to do the testing and commissioning:
a. Tester / Volt-Ohm Meter
b. Pliers, Long Nose, and Wire Cutter
c. Flat and Philips Screw Driver
d. Radio (Walkie-Talkie)
e. Ladder
4.1.3 To proceed in a BMS testing and commissioning, work permit is needed when working in a
closed area or in a shaft.
4.1.4 All approved relevant BMS data gathering panel design and BMS shop drawings like single-
line diagram, NAE riser, database and floor plan to locate the device.
4.1.5 BMS testing and commissioning checklists of the field devices
4.1.6 Verify that all interfacing / integration requirements are installed & tested in either cases
whether it is hardwired or high level thru communication.
4.2 Pre-Commissioning Checks
4.2.1 Visual inspection to ensure that all equipment are installed as per drawings and
specifications, and complies with all relevant codes and practices.
4.2.2 Checking of Riser Cable
a. Continuity Test
b. Tagging / Labelling at both ends
c. Proper termination to the cabinet
4.2.3 Checking of Wire for Communication Bus
a. Continuity Test
3 of 13
4.2.4 Checking of Wire for Field Controller Bus
a. Continuity Test
4.2.5 Checking of Horizontal Wire
a. Continuity Test
b. Tagging / Labelling at both ends or devices
c. Proper termination to the BMS Cabinet
d. Proper designation of cables to the devices
4.2.6 Point to point checking/ inspection of DDC panel if properly/ correctly installed.
PART 5 - TESTING PROCEDURES
There’s a lot of testing procedure for Building Management System. All items should be considered
for testing, to ensure functionality of the system.
5.1 TOOLS / EQUIPMENTS
Testing devices for the BMS is used to test all the equipments, devices and cables in the
system. Such testing devices are listed below:
5.1.1 Tester/ Volt-Ohm Meter
Tester is used to test the line connection of wires. It is also used for continuity testing, to
determine if the line is shorted or has an open connection.
5.1.2 Pliers, Long Nose, and Wire Cutter
The pliers, long nose and wire cutters are use to fix the connectivity of the wires to different
wires and to the device and/or equipment.
5.1.3 Flat and Philips screw driver
Set of screw drivers are necessary to connect the cires and cables to the device and / or
equipment.
5.1.4 Radio (Walkie-Talkie)
Walkie Talkies are used by the commissioning agents to communicate during testing
especially when the engineers are in the room where the BMS Cabinet is located and the
technicians are in the field devices.
5.1.5 Ladder
Ladder is used by commissioning agents or helper to check the devices installed on ceiling or
highly elevated devices.
4 of 13
5.2 WIRE TESTING
5.2.1 Riser Wiring
a. The TF wires will be from the Network Automation Engine to the topmost level of the
building passing through the pull boxes in every floor/ level where the termination of
horizontal wires takes place.
b. The TF wires will then be tested using a continuity tester (an LED and sounder tester)
or a VOM (Volt/ Ohm Meter Tester). This is the initial test that is being performed to
see to it that the cables are not shorted or grounded. This will facilitate the
commissioning engineers a better and faster commissioning of the Building
Management System. It is very important to tag the “IN” and “out” cables since this is
very important during commissioning.
5.3 BMS CABINET TESTING
Termination of wires with the Addressable Network Automation Engine and Direct Digital
Controllers will be done by engineer at the same time designed the program for the Building
Management System. It will be easier if the one who made the program will also be the one
to terminate from the cabinet to avoid such errors because the termination depends from the
downloaded program. Termination at the BMS Cabinet is as simple as the termination of
building management devices to the appropriate groupings of cabinet.
5.3.1 Power Testing
All FEC, IOM, and NAE’s are 24VAC supplied. A step-down transformer (230VAC to 24VAC)
is installed in every DDC / NAE panel to supply a 24VAC to the controllers. Before switching
on the power the following are conducted to ensure power safety.
a. Make sure that power is stable and functional
b. Use a multimeter to check the main power (220VAC-230VAC)
c. Check the step-down power in the transformer (24VAC) using multimeter
5.4 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SERVER
Termination of wires and networking of the Building Management System Server will be done
by engineer at the same time designed the program for the Building Management System.
And it will be easier if the one who made the program will also be the one to terminate from
the cabinet to avoid such errors because the termination depends from the downloaded
program. The Building Management System Engineer should be assisted by the Network
Administration of the Sub-Contractor for the Networking requirements.
5.4.1 Graphics Testing
The field device and exact location of the field device on testing should automatically be
shown on the monitor of server. The address and location name of the controllers and
devices on testing should be indicated on the screen while its icon is blinking.
5.4.2 Database Recording
The alarm generated on the BMS Cabinet will be automatically recorded on the database of
the Building Management System Server.
5 of 13
5.5 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CLIENT WORKSTATION
Termination of wires and networking of the Building Management System Client Workstation
will be done by engineer at the same time designed the program for the building Management
System. And it will be easier if the one who made the program will also be the one to
terminate from the cabinet to avoid such errors because the termination depends from the
downloaded program. The Building Management System Engineer should be assisted by the
Network Administration of the Sub-Contractor for the Networking requirements.
5.5.1 The field device and exact location of the field device on testing should automatically be
shown on the monitor of server. The address and location name of the controllers and
devices on testing should be indicated on the screen while its icon is blinking.
5.6 PROGRAMMING OF THE SYSTEM
The system programming will be done by the systems engineer knowledgeable and in-charge
on Building Management Systems. On this method, the Systems Engineer will make a
program of the whole system by configuring all the devices and addresses that will operate
depending on the design and specification requirements. The NAE Program via RJ45 will do
this thru PC. The programming and configuration will be in conjunction with the Building
Management Device Location and Address.
5.7 FIELD CONTROLLER TESTING
After all the devices are installed and connected to the controllers, including the configuration
and programming since our controllers is an addressable Direct Digital Controller, the system
is ready for testing. During testing and commissioning, proper testing of each of the devices
will be implemented as follows:
5.2.1 Binary Input
a. Choose one point.
b. If the point is operational (ex: auto/ manual switch that can be rotated) then physically
alternate its state from the field.
c. Check on the workstation monitor if any value is alternating state.
d. If yes, check that the software name of this software point coincides with the field
point we are testing.
e. If the point indication is impossible to change, it can be simulated manually (this is

done in general for all faults and alarms) and the same steps ( 3 & 4 ) are continued.
f. If the point is not operational, simulate a binary switch at the unit and label ‘Not
Operational”.
5.2.2 Binary Output
a. Verify proper interfacing device is installed. (e.g. Relay)
b. With power OFF at controlled devices, ensure the interfacing device responds to a
Software / Manual command.
6 of 13
5.2.3 Analogue Input
a. Measure the actual input variable.
b. Check the value read on the commissioning tool, and verify that it corresponds to the
measured one.
c. Check that the unit on the commissioning software point is matching the parameter
we are checking.
d. Check that the input we are reading has a logical sense and does not fall out of
common sense range.
5.2.4 Analogue Output
a. Check that the unit on the commissioning software point is matching the parameter
we are checking.
b. Send multiple different outputs.
c. Verify that the connected device is physically responding according to each output
sent.
d. Calibrate the device if needed (in our case all valves, tested and calibrated prior to
they use on site).
e. If the connected device has a feedback, then check that the feedback of the device
corresponds with the output sent.
5.2.5 Duct Temperature Sensor
a. Make sure that the sensor is installed, check installed on the checklist.
b. Verify the sensor reading, by comparing the temperature read on the fronted tool and
the resistance measured on the terminal block by the voltmeter. Use the table below
(Figure-2: nominal temperature vs. resistance) to check the matching.
7 of 13
Temperature Resistance (ohms)

Thermistor
°F °C Ni Pt*
2.2k 10k
-50 -46 674.00 821.00 109,905.00 489,981.00
-40 -40 699.00 843.00 75,487.00 366,185.00
-30 -34 725.00 865.00 52,584.00 233,990.00
-20 -29 752.00 887.00 37,123.00 1,665,085.00
-10 -23 777.00 908.00 26,544.00 117,978.00
0 -18 803.00 930.00 19,210.00 85,349.00
10 -12 830.00 952.00 14,063.00 62,464.00
20 -7 858.00 974.00 10,408.00 46,221.00
30 -1 885.00 996.00 7,783.00 34,562.00
40 4 914.00 1,017.00 5,879.00 26,103.00
50 10 942.00 1,039.00 4,482.00 19,903.00
60 16 971.00 1,061.00 3,449.00 15,313.00
70 21 1,000.00 1,082.00 2,676.00 11,883.00
80 27 1,030.00 1,104.00 2,049.00 9,298.00
90 32 1,060.00 1,125.00 1,651.00 7,333.00
100 38 1,090.00 1,147.00 1,312.00 5,872.00
110 43 1,121.00 1,168.00 1,050.00 4,663.00
120 49 1,152.00 1,190.00 846.00 3,757.00
130 54 1,184.00 1,211.00 686.00 3,048.00
140 60 1,216.00 1,232.00 560.00 2,488.00
150 66 1,248.00 1,254.00 460.00 2,043.00
160 71 1,281.00 1,275.00 380.00 1,687.00
170 77 1,314.00 1,296.00 315.00 1,401.00
180 82 1,348.00 1,317.00 263.00 1,170.00
190 88 1,382.00 1,339.00 221.00 982.00
200 93 1,417.00 1,360.00 186.00 828.00
210 99 1,452.00 1,381.00 158.00 701.00
220 104 1,487.00 1,402.00 134.00 597.00
Table 7. Nominal Temperature vs. Resistance
5.2.6 Differential Pressure Switch
a. Make sure that the sensor is installed, check installed on the checklist. \
b. With the relevant fan running adjust the pressure set point of the differential pressure
switch until the contacts close. Turn off the fan and check the contacts have opened.
c. Cycle the differential pressure switch two and three times by operating the fan on and
off and each time check the switch contacts have opened and closed appropriately.
5.2.7 Dirty Filter Alarm
8 of 13
b. Set the differential pressure switch to the setting given by the customer for “filter dirty”
condition. Check that switching occurs at the set differential pressure (between 10 to
30% of the scale range).
c. Recalibrate if necessary.
5.2.8 Damper Control ( Open / Close Control )
b. Check the Actuator and Damper are correctly assembled.
c. Set damper end switch positions and verify operation.
5.2.9 Carbon Monoxide Sensor
b. Test each CO Detector for Proper Function.
c. To confirm that a digital readout CO detector is detecting carbon monoxide, test it

with a substance that will detect low levels of the gas, such as a lit cigarette or a lit
incense wand. As you move the cigarette or wand within 8 inches of the CO detector,
the digital display should change to register the presence of carbon monoxide.
5.2.10 Duct Smoke Alarm Sensor
a. The built-in test feature, i.e., the test magnet, test switch, etc., should be performed.
These features are designed to meet the intent of the NFPA and Underwriters
Laboratories functional test requirements, to electronically or mechanically simulate
gray smoke, not to exceed 6%/ft. obscuration. This will assure the detector is
operable and will respond to minimum smoke requirements.
b. When attempting to verify that the detector will respond to smoke in the duct airflow,
the pressure differential should be measured across the sampling tubes (exhaust &
intake) using a manometer.
c. Next, apply smoke directly to the detector head to initiate an alarm. The sampling and
exhaust tubes may need to be blocked off for this test and then reopened afterwards.
5.3 PROGRAMMING TESTING
Programming for Building Management System of Globe Telecom Headquarters includes

programming of DDC and programming of front end equipment. The following items should
be observed before we can commission the programs.
a. Make sure that all DDC’s and NAE’s are all power up.
b. All listed on the pre-commission checklist should be inspected and done (refer to 4.2
Pre-Commissioning Check).
c. In the workstation, log-in username and password (see Figure 7).
d. A certain DDC accumulate the CAF file name of the program.
e. Point to point checking of points list per floor shall be conducted, to make sure that
there is no single point was missed.
f. In the main page of the graphics user interface, tests click all command buttons, to
check if all buttons will respond to its correct description.
9 of 13
g. All items should be recorded in the program testing form, (see Appendix 5).
PART 6 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Sequence of operation listed below are all based on the specification and construction bulletin issued
by the consultant / designer.
6.1 AIR HANDLING UNIT
a. In automode, system is energized by local control (DDC).
b. In manual mode, each equipment is started or stopped manually
c. When airflow is established as sensed by Air Flow Switch, control system is

activated.
d. Supply air temp. Sensor shall modulate the chilled water control valve CV-1 in
proportion to the cooling demand. The control valve shall be closed when AHU
operation is stopped.
e. CO2 transmitter installed on the return duct shall modulate the motorized damper MD
to meet the desired CO2 concentration level.
f. Smoke detector SD in AHU shall de-energize system and provide signal to fire alarm
panel upon sensing products of combustion.
VAV control thru duct static pressure sensor Variable Air Volume
(1) (VAV) terminals throttle to maintain the desired room temperature based on
the resulting increase in duct static pressure as sensed by Static Pressure
Sensor (SPS), the vsd slows down the AHU fan to maintain the desired static
pressure setting. Upon increase in demand for cooling, the VAV terminals
modulates to open position, thereby decreasing the duct static pressure and
causes the VSD to speed up the AHU fan.
(2) The AHU motor speed shall be modulated by the DDC thru the VSD to
maintain the duct static pressure, as measured by the static pressure sensor
at the supply air duct, at a pre-defined set point, whenever the VSD is in the
“auto” mode. The duct static pressure set point is user adjustable from 250-
750 Pa (1-3 inches of water).
(3) The DDC shall set the speed to 40% when the AHU status is “off” as
indicated by the status contact from the VSD of the AHU motor.
6.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME
a. Temperature sensor T senses room temperature in individual spaces from no cooling

to full cooling and send signal to DDC.
(1) The programmed set point temperature shall command VAV motorized
damper to modulate to maintain temperature set point within the space.
(2) When switch button located adjacent to VAV box is pushed, DDC control set
point shall be overriden. The slider control shall act as a manual set point
which will control VAV damper position.
(3) After a pre-determined time of two (2) hours, the DDC set point shall override
the manual setting and shall govern the operation of the VAV damper.
10 of 13
6.3 JET FAN
1. In the event the Carbon Monoxide (CO) sensor detect a concentration of 50ppm at
any sample point in any of the Car Park Zone Area, the corresponding main extract
and supply fan will operate and run at normal speed.
2. Simultaneously, the corresponding group of Jet Fans in the detected zone will be
actuated at low speed to dilute the “CO” concentration and push them toward the
extract point.
3. Once the “CO” sensor detect the concentration is reduced to about 20ppm, the above
main fans and Jet Fans will shut down.
4. In periods when the underground car park area temperature rises to about 35°C, the
temperature sensor will signal the main supply and extract fan to run simultaneously
at a specified low speed. When the surrounding temperature is decreased to about
28°C, the temperature sensor will signal the main fans to shut down.
5. The main extract and supply fan shall be Variable Speed Drive whereas the jet fan
shall be two (2) speeds. Activation of these fans shall be in conjunction with the
zoned “CO” sensors and temperature sensors.
ON FIRE MODE (FIRE CONDITION):
(i) In the event of fire detection thru Heat Detectors and after a pre-set stand still
escape period, the Jet Fans in the fire area / level will be activated and will
run at full speed to quickly and effectively clear the smoke. Simultaneously,
the Jet Fans in all other levels will be switched off.
(ii) The main supply and extract fans will simultaneously switch into smoke and
extract mode immediately.
(iii) All fans activated in the smoke extract zones will automatically run in the pre-
set fan high speed and direction of extraction points.
(iv) The smoke purging will continue until such time the fire marshal declared that
the parking area on fire is already smoke-free.
(v) Visual and audible alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the car
park ventilation / smoke extract control panel. Mute switch shall be provided
to silence the alarm.
(vi) After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal
mode thru a “System Store” switch.
6.4 STAIRWELL PRESSURIZATION FAN
a. Upon receiving a fire signal, SPF shall automatically run.
b. The Variable Speed Fan shall maintain a pressure differential of 25-50 Pa between the
stairway and the adjacent corridor. This differential pressure shall be monitored in the
BMS thru the differential pressure transmitter DPT.
c. Smoke detector in PAU shall de-energize system and provide signal to Fire Alarm Panel
upon sensing products of combustion.
6.5 KITCHEN EXHAUST FAN
a. Fan is started and stopped manually or on a time schedule through the DDC
b. Control system shall monitor fan on-off status and fan motor Alarm / Trip Status. KEF is
interlocked with KSF
11 of 13
6.6 PAHU, CO2 SENSOR, VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME
a. In auto mode, system is monitored and controlled by DDC.
b. In manual mode, PAHU is started or stopped manually.
c. When airflow is established as sensed by Air Flow Switch (AFS), the control system
is activated.
d. The pre-cooled supply air temperature sensor set at 23°C shall modulate the chilled
water control valve (say CV-1). The control valve CV-1 shall be closed when PAHU
operation is stopped.
e. The CO2 transmitter installed on the return air duct of the AHU shall modulate the
motorized damper (MD) installed on the AHU’s fresh air duct from PAHU to meet the
desired CO2 concentration level in the office area.
f. The VFD will control the fan speed of the PAHU based on the resulting increase /
decrease in duct static pressure as sensed by the static pressure sensor (SPS) /
transmitter mounted on a point 2/3 of the length of the main PAHU supply air duct.
g. Upon increase (or decrease) in demand for fresh air as signalled by the CO2
transmitter, the MD modulates to open (or closed) position thereby decreasing (or
increasing) the duct static pressure and causes the VFD to speed up (or slow down)
the PAHU fan.
h. The Smoke Detector (SD) installed in AHU return air duct shall de-energize the
system and provide signal to the fire alarm panel upon sensing products of
combustion.
6.7 FUEL PUMP AND TANK
a. FP-01 served as main pump while FP-02 shall be the stand-by unit. Switching from
duty to stand-by shall be automatic.
b. When the motor controller is in the auto mode, the pump shall start automatically
when the low level switch is activated. The pump shall automatically stop when the
high level switch is activated.
c. When the motor controller is in the manual mode, pumps can be manually started or
stopped.
d. FP shall not start when fuel at storage tank is very low or the level is below the
suction line.
e. Provide electronic tank gauge and leak detection system to be interfaced with BMS
panel.
6.8 SMOKE EXTRACTION (SEF, GEF, MUAF, AHU)
a. NORMAL MODE
(1) The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector switch.
In the manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually
while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor
automatic operation is possible.
(2) In the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the BMS or
the local motor control panel at the AHU room.
(3) Upon start of the AHU, the pre-cooled air unit (PAU) and general exhaust fan
(GEF) runs simultaneously, the ac control system is energized. The PAU
automatic dampers AD-1, AD-2, AD-6 and AD-9 opens.
12 of 13
(4) The PAU and AHU chilled water control valve opens and modulates in
response to discharge air temperature as sensed by the room thermostat.
(5) Pre-cooled air is supplied to the AHU as make-up air for the ventilation
requirement to the office floor.
(6) Variable Speed Drive (VSD) varies the PAU fan speed in response to the
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) level as sensed by the CO2 sensor located in the
return duct of the AHU.
b. SMOKE EXTRACTION MODE
(1) On fire mode as sensed by the AHU return duct smoke detector, the AHU fan
motor in the office on fire will shut down automatically.
(2) Upon system stop, the PAU and GEF shall stop, de-energized and shall
automatically close the normally open automatic dampers AD-1, AD-2, AD-6
and AD-9.
(3) After fire sprinkler activation mode and smoke within the floor on fire were
sensed, the Smoke Exhaust Fan (SEF) and Make-up Air Fan (MUAF) will run
to purge the smoke. Simultaneously, the normally close dampers AD-3, AD-
4, AD-7 and AD-8 will automatically open.
(4) The smoke purging will continue until such time the fire marshall declared
that the floor is already smoke free.
(5) Visual and audible alarm mode shall ne indicated in the BMS and the MCP at
the FCC and AHU room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm.
(6) After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal
mode thru a “system restore” switch.
PART 7 - MATERIALS USED
To completely accomplish a testing and commissioning procedure, some materials or tools should be
used. These materials are:
7.1 Digital Multimeter
7.2 Screwdriver Set
7.3 Pliers
7.4 Wire Stripper
7.5 Tagging Tape & Marker
7.6 Walkie-Talkie Radio
*******
13 of 13
Section VI- Technical Specifications Supply and Installation of Elevators
SECTION 15980 - SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS
1.1 Scope of Works:
The total tender price for the contract shall be for the complete installation including supply,
delivery, installation, testing and putting in commission, hand over in working order and
maintenance thereafter for a period of 12 months, all in accordance with the specification,
scope of work and drawings.
The itemized breakdown of the lump sum tender price as listed below shall form only as an
indicator of the breakdown value for this contract works. The tender shall price the contract
works in accordance with the tender drawings, specification, general and preliminaries and
the conditions of Contract. Tenderers are encouraged to submit their forthcoming latest
equipment / module currently under research and development as alteration offer. No claim
for extra or otherwise shall be considered for any trade / items / works as specified and shown
in the tender drawings and specification but not described hereunder:
Item No. Description

A. Passenger Elevators
1. To supply, install, test and commission Passenger / Service Elevators complete with
the following details as noted in the specifications and drawings:
a. Elevator equipment including traction machines, governors, brakes, solid estate,

motor drives (ACVVVF), microprocessors and control panels, etc.
b. Car cage, car doors, landing doors, locking devices, full door height safety
edges, car operating panels, car position and directional up-down indicators,
return panels frames, columns, door jambs, transom panel, architraves, landing
sills, etc.
c. Landing Door Finishes
d. Hall equipment including hall lanterns, directional up-down indicators, and chime
units, car positions indicators, hall call buttons, etc.
e. Car internal fixtures including emergency lighting fixtures, ventilation fans and
grilles, speakers, etc.
f. Intercom systems for all elevators including master intercom in machine room
and all supervisory panels with nickel cadmium batteries, chargers, wirings and
conduits, etc.
g. Telecom systems for each elevators cars.
h. Nickel cadmium batteries, chargers and all wirings and conduits for emergency
lights and ventilation fans.
i. Guides, rails and fixings, buffers, metal screen guardings, counterweights,

cables, ropes, cat ladders, chequered plates and all other necessary works in
elevator shafts.
j. Electrical works and installation including panel board assemblies, starters,

protections, elevator shaft lighting outlets as well as the required interfacing
devices for Fire Alarm System, BMS, etc. This will include wiring, conduits, etc.
1 of 3
k. Painting and Labelling
2. Any other works or equipment not covered by the above but are required to
complete the installations as a whole as per drawings and specification.
B. General and Preliminaries
a. Mobilisation
b. Site Office & Stores
c. Insurance
d. Protection of Equipment
e. Hoisting of Equipment & Accessories to various floors
f. Central Control Console

Option: Software Based Monitoring System
g. Cost of Installation
h. Shop / Working Drawings
i. As-built / Record Drawings
j. Maintenance Manual
k. Training / Tuition to Clients staff on operation of the system
l. Cost of Full Time Site Supervisor for the duration of the works
m. Cost of fixed 5-year operations & maintenance contract
n. Cost for the use of the Service Elevator during the construction.
o. Provisional cost of 24-hour Resident Technician during the first ninety (90) days of
operation.
p. Provisional cost for supply of spare parts.
q. Provisional cost for the prolonged usage of the Service Elevator (rate/month)
2 of 3

C. Provisional Sum for elevator car interior finishes
D. Testing, Commissioning & Maintenance
E. Tender Price for Elevator Installation

F. Total Tender Price for Elevator Installation
******
3 of 3
Section VI- Technical Specifications Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems
SECTION 15996 - TESTING AND BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
The provisions of Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements",

apply to this section.
1.1.1 Definitions
a. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment,
(e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling, etc.).
b. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (sub mains, branches and
terminals) in accordance with specified design quantities.
c. Procedure: Standardize approach and execution of sequence of work operations to

yield reproducible results.
d. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collection of test data in logical order for
submission and review. This data should also form the permanent record which shall be
used as the basis for any future testing, adjusting, and balancing required.
e. Test: To determine quantities performance of equipment.
1.1.2 Submittals
Submit the following:
a. Standards Compliance
Testing Agency
Testing Agency Personnel
Professional Engineers
Instrument Calibration
b. Schedules
Testing Agenda
1.2 TESTING AND BALANCING AGENCY
1.2.1 Air and Water Systems Testing and Balancing
Upon completion of the installation and field testing, performance test and adjust the supply,
return, make-up, and exhaust air systems, and chilled, water systems to provide the air volume
and water flow quantities indicated. Accomplish all work in accordance with the agenda and
procedures specified under AABC 71679 and standards of the NEBB. Correct air and water
system performance deficiencies disclosed by the test before balancing the systems. TAB
contractor to submit checklist/ report to the Project Management Consultant before balancing
the air and water systems.
1.2.2 Agency Qualifications
The Contractor, as part of this contract, shall obtain the services of a qualified testing
organization to perform the testing and balancing work as herein specified. Prior to
commencing work under this section of the specifications, the testing organization shall submit
the TAB Organization Chart showing that a registered PME-Professional Mechanical Engineer
is included to supervised and prepare the system performance report during TAB Activity and
1 of 9
Final TAB report prior to System Final Commissioning. The TAB Contractor shall report directly
to the Project Management Consultant of the progress and quality of the TAB activity and final T
& C – Testing and Commissioning.
1.3 AGENDA
1.3.1 Preliminary Report
Review plans and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected system. Submit a
written report to the Engineer indicating any deficiencies in the system that would preclude the
proper adjusting, balancing, and testing of the systems.
1.3.2 Submittal
An agenda shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to start of testing and
balancing work. Include the following:
a. General description of each air and water system with its associated equipment, and
operation cycles for cooling and heating.
b. A complete listing of all air and water flow and air terminal measurements to be
performed.
c. Specific test procedures and parameters for determining specified quantities; e.g., flow
drafts, etc., from the actual field measurements to establish compliance with contract
requirements.
d. Samples of forms showing applications of procedures and calculations to typical

systems.
1.3.3 Procedure Reporting
Provide specific test procedures for measuring air quantities at terminals. Specify type of
instrument to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch), and factors for:
a. Air terminal configuration

b. Flow direction (supply or exhaust)
c. Velocity corrections
d. Effective area applicable to each size and type of air terminal
1.3.4 Area and Application Factors
Will not be required where pivot tubes are employed to determine terminal capacity.
1.4 PROCEDURES, GENERAL
1.4.1 Requirements
Adjust systems and components thereof that perform as required by drawings and
specifications.
1.4.2 Test Duration
Operating tests of cooling coils, fans and other equipment shall be of not less than 4 hours
duration, after stabilized operating conditions have been established.
2 of 9
1.4.3 Instrumentation
Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the approved agenda.

Furnish all personnel, instruments, and equipment for tests specified herein.
a. Accuracy of Instruments
Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate. Provide calibration histories for
each instrument for examination. Calibrate each test instrument by an approved
laboratory or by the manufacturer. The Engineer has the right to request instrument
recalibration, or the use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy or
readings is questionable.
b. Application of Instruments
Comply with manufacturer's certified instructions.
c. Permanently-Installed Instruments
Do not install permanently-installed equipment used for the tests, e.g., gages,
thermometers, etc., until just prior to the tests to avoid damage and changes in
calibration.
d. Accuracy of all Thermometers
Plus or minus one graduation at the temperatures to be measured. Graduations shall

conform to the following schedule:
Medium Design Temperature Maximum

Differential (Deg. F.) Graduation (Deg. F.)
Air 10 or less ½
Air Over 10 1
Water 10 or less 1/10
Water 10 – 20 ½
Water Over 20 1
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
2.1.1 Adjustments
Adjust all air handling systems to provide the required design air quantity to, or through, each
component. Conduct adjusting and balancing of systems during periods of the year
approximating maximum seasonal operation. Doors shall be closed and fume hood sashes full
open, and all other ancillary system in simultaneous operation.
2.1.2 Equalizers
Adjust equalizing devices to provide uniform velocity across the inlets (duct side for supply) of
terminals, prior to measuring flow rates.
2.1.3 Balanced
Use flow adjusting (volume control) devices to balance air quantities only; i.e., proportion flow
between various terminals comprising system, and only to the extent that their adjustments do
not create objectionable air motion or sound, i.e., in excess of specified limits.
3 of 9
2.1.3.1 Balancing between Runs (sub mains, branch mains and branches)
Use flow regulating devices at, or, in, the divided - flow fitting. Minimize restriction imposed by
flow regulating devices in or at terminals.
2.1.3.2 Final Measurements of Air Quantity
Make final measurements of air quantity, after the air terminals have been adjusted to provide
the optimum air patterns of diffusion.
2.1.4 Fan Adjustment
Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan speed, or axial-flow
fan wheel blade pitch. For systems with direct-connected fans (without adjustable pitch blades),
damper restrictions of system's total flow may be used, only if system pressure is less than 13
mm w.g. and sound level criteria is met.
2.1.5 Air Measurement
2.1.5.1 Pivot Tube
Except as specifically indicated herein, make pitot tube traverses of each duct to measure air
flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques shall conform to the
ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals.
2.1.5.2 Pitot Tube Traverse
Except for ducts serving modular office areas with movable partitions, which are subject to
change, Pitot-tube traverse may be omitted if the duct serves only a single room or space and
its design volume is less than 2000 cfm. In lieu of Pitot-tube traverse, determine air flow in the
duct by totalling volume of individual terminals served, measured as described herein.
2.1.5.3 Measurements of Air Quantity
Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000 (fpm/cfm), air quantity
may be determined by measurements at terminals served.
2.1.5.4 Test Holes
Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows, bends,
take-offs, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements.
2.1.5.5 Air Terminal Balancing
Measurement of flow rates by means of velocity meters applied to individual terminals, with or
without cones or other adapters, shall be used only for balancing. Measurement of air
quantities at each type of air terminal (inlet and outlet) shall be determined by the method
approved for balancing agenda. Conduct laboratory tests to prove accuracy of methodology
when so directed by the Engineer. Perform such tests in conformance with applicable ASHRAE
or ASME codes.
2.1.5.6 Air Motion and Distribution
As indicated. The Contractor, in addition to air motion measurements, shall make smoke tests
wherever requested by the Engineer, to demonstrate the air distribution from air terminals.
4 of 9
2.2 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES
2.2.1 Adjustment
Adjust chilled water systems to provide required quantity to, or through each component.
2.2.2 Metering
Measure water quantities and pressure with calibrated meters.
2.2.2.1 Water Measurements and Balancing
Use venturi tubes, orifices, or other metering fittings and pressure gages. Adjust systems to
provide the approved pressure drops through the heat transfer equipment prior to the capacity
testing. Where flow metering fittings are not installed, determine flow balance by measuring
temperature differential across the heat transfer equipment. Perform measurement of
temperature differential with the air system, adjusted as described herein, in operation.
2.2.3 Automatic Controls
Position automatic control valves for full flow through the heat transfer equipment of the system
during tests.
2.2.4 Flow
Flow through by-pass circuits at three-way valves shall be adjusted to balance that through the
supply circuit.
2.2.5 Distribution
Adjust distribution by means of balancing devices (cocks, valves, and fittings) and automatic
flow control valves. Do not use service valves for adjustment. Where automatic flow control
valves are utilized in lieu of venture tubes, record only pressure drop across the valve if said
pressure drop is within the pressure drop rating on the valve tag.
2.2.6 Special Procedures
Where available, pump capacity (as designed) is less than total flow requirements of individual
heat transfer units of system served, full flow may be simulated by the temporary restriction of
flow to portions of the system. In such a case, delineate specific procedures in the agenda.
2.3 CERTIFIED REPORTS
2.3.1 Submittal
Submit three copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system
performance, and air motion (fpm), to the Engineer prior to final tests and inspection.
2.3.2 Instrument Records
Include types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments.
2.3.3 Reports
Reports shall identify conspicuously items not conforming to contract requirements, or obvious
mal-operation and design deficiencies.
5 of 9
2.3.4 Certification
The reports shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer who is

versed in the field of air and water balancing and who is not affiliated with any firm involved in
the design or construction phases of the project. Certification shall include checking or
adherence to agenda of calculations, procedures, and evaluation of final summaries.
2.4 AIR SYSTEM DATA
2.4.1 Report
The certified report shall include for each air-handling system the data listed below:
a. Equipment (fan or factory fabricated station unit):
(1) Installation Data:
(i) Manufacturer and Model

(ii) Size
(iii) Arrangement, Discharge, and Class
(iv) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, Cycles, and Full Load
Amps.
(v) Location and Local Identification Data
(2) Design Data: Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications.
(3) Fan Recorded (Test) Data
(i) C.F.M.
(ii) Static Pressure
(iii) R.P.M.
(iv) Motor Operating Amps.
(v) Motor Operating B.H.P.
b. Duct Systems:
(1) Duct Air Quantities (Maximum and Minimum) - Main, Submains, Branches,
Outdoor (Outside) Air, Total-Air, and Exhaust
(i) Duct size(s)

(ii) Number of Pitot-tube (Pressure) Measurements
(iii) Sum of Velocity Measurement, excluding pressure measurements
(iv) Average Velocity
(v) Recorded (Test) C.F.M.
(vi) Design C.F.M.
(2) Individual Air Terminals:
(i) Terminal Identification (Supply or Exhaust, \Location and Number

Designation)
(ii) Type Size, Manufacturer, and Catalog Identification
(iii) Design and Recorded Quantities - C.F.M.
(iv) Deflector Vane or Diffusion Cone Settings
(v) Applicable Factor for Application, Velocity, Area, etc.
(vi) Design and Recorded Velocities - F.P.M. (State "core" "inlet," etc., as
applicable)
6 of 9
2.5 WATER SYSTEM DATA
2.5.1 Report
Include data listed below:
a. Pumps:

(ii) Size
(iii) Type Drive
(iv) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, and Full Load Amps.
(2) Design Data:
(i) G.P.M.
(ii) Head
(iii) R.P.M.
(iv) B.H.P. and Amps.
(3) Recorded Data:
(i) Discharge Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow)

(ii) Suction Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow)
(iii) Operating Head
(iv) Operating G.P.M. (from pump curves if metering is not provided)
(v) No-load Amps. (Where possible)
(vi) Full-Flow Amps
(vii) No-Flow Amps
b. Air Handling and Cooling Equipment:
(1) Design Data:
(i) Load in Btu per hr

(ii) G.P.M.
(iii) Entering and Leaving Water Temperature
(iv) Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B)
(v) C.F.M.
(vi) Water Pressure Drop
(2) Recorded Data:
(i) Type of Equipment and Identification (location or number designation)

(ii) Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B.)
(iii) Entering and Leaving Water Temperatures
(iv) G.P.M. (if metered)
(v) Temperature Rise or Drop
c. Water Chilling Units

(ii) Motor H.P., Voltage, Cycles, Phase, and Full Load Amps.
(iii) Part Load Amperes
(iv) G.P.M.
(v) Water Pressure Drop
7 of 9
(vi) Entering and Leaving Water Temperature
(2) Recorded Data
(i) G.P.M.
(ii) Water Pressure Drop
(iii) Entering and Leaving Water Temperature
(iv) Amperes
2.6 FINAL TESTS, INSPECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
2.6.1 Capacity and Performance Tests
Make tests to demonstrate that capacities and general performance of air and water systems
comply with contract requirements.
2.6.1.1 Final Inspection
At the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall recheck, in the presence of the Engineer,
random selections of data, water and air quantities and air motion recorded in the certified
report.
2.6.1.2 Points and Areas for Recheck
As selected by the Engineer.
2.6.1.3 Measurement and Test Procedures
As approved for work forming basis of certified report.
2.6.1.4 Selections for Recheck (specific plus random)
In general, selections for recheck will not exceed 25 percent of the total number tabulated in the
report, except that special air systems may require a complete recheck for safety reasons.
2.6.2 Retests
If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of ten percent or more from that recorded in the
certified report listings, at ten percent or more of the rechecked selections, the report shall be
automatically rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and
tested, new data recorded, new certified reports submitted, and new inspection tests made.
2.6.3 Marking of Settings
Following final acceptance of certified reports by the Engineer, the settings of all valves, volume,
dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked by the Contractor, so that
adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Do not mark devices until after final
acceptance.
8 of 9
Payment shall be made upon acceptance by the engineer after conducting the testing and
balancing showing that the equipment conforms and satisfies the requirement of the
specifications. Complete testing and balancing report signed by the contractor and the
Engineer, (6 – sets) shall be submitted to the Engineer.
******
9 of 9

SectVI Specification V3of4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SectVI Specification V3of4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Republic of the Philippines

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION & COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION VI – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

BICOL INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT

SCHEMA Konsult, Inc. joint venture with:

SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES

PART A - FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER (INCLUDING ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE)

PART B - OTHER REQUIREMENTS

II. SITE DEVELOPMENT WORKS

• EARTHWORKS AND SECURITY FENCE/GATES

Item 100 Clearing and Grubbing ........................................................................................................ 2

PART F– BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION (for cross reference only)

Item 404 Reinforcing Steel ................................................................................................................. 3

PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES

Item 604 Security Fence and Gates ................................................................................................... 6

• WATER SUPPLY WELLS

Section 1 Drilling, Construction and Testing of Test/Production Well ......................................... 18

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION

02302 Excavation, Backfilling, and compacting for utilities ...................................................... 8

03300 Cast in Place Concrete ..................................................................................................... 18

04800 Reinforced Masonry ............................................................................................................ 7

05120 Structural Steel .................................................................................................................... 5

DIVISION 6 – WOODS AND PLASTICS

06400 Finish Carpentry .................................................................................................................. 3

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 Steel Doors and Frames ..................................................................................................... 4

09601 Epoxy Coating ..................................................................................................................... 3

10165 Toilet Compartments ........................................................................................................... 2

12600 Furniture and Accessories .................................................................................................. 2

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13100 Lighting Protection System .................................................................................................. 3

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM

14210 Passenger Elevator ............................................................................................................. 3

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (HVAC)

15011 Mechanical General Requirements ................................................................................... 10

16011 Electrical General Requirements ..................................................................................... 10

SCTION 15110 - VALVES

2. 65 mm and larger AWWA C508

4.0 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

5.0 BASIS OF PAYMENT

Payment will be made in accordance with the Bill of Quantities.

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

d Distance between two brackets (cm)

3.2.4 Water Hammer Arrestors

4.0 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

5.0 BASIS OF PAYMENT

Payment will be made in accordance with the Bill of Quantities.

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

1.2.1 American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

ANSI A112.21.1M Floor Drains

1.2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME A112.36.2M Cleanouts

1.2.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM D2729 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints of Polyvinyl

1.2.4 International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)

IAPMO PS 8 Oil and Sand Interceptors

1.2.5 Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)

G-101 Grease Traps

1.2.6. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE)

1.4.1 Drawings and Data

1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1.5.1 Storage and Handling